Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C350 series Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Canon Manuals
  4. Printer
  5. imageRUNNER ADVANCE C350 series
  6. Service manual

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C350 series Service Manual

Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

imageRUNNER ADVANCE C351/C350/C250
Series
Service Manual Rev. 0.0
Product Overview
Technical Explanation
Periodical Service
Disassembly/Assembly
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Error•Jam•Alarm
Service Mode
Installation
Appendix
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C350 series

Summary of Contents for Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C350 series

  • Page 1 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C351/C350/C250 Series Service Manual Rev. 0.0 Product Overview Technical Explanation Periodical Service Disassembly/Assembly Adjustment Troubleshooting Error•Jam•Alarm Service Mode Installation Appendix...
  • Page 2 This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the edition of this manual.
  • Page 3 Explanation of Symbols Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual. Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed. Check. Remove the claw. The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: Check visually. Insert the claw.

  • Page 4: Table Of Contents

    Contents Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9 Weight and Size -------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9 Productivity (Print speed) -------------------------------------------------------1-10 Paper type -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11 Pickup ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11 Safety Precautions Parts Name ------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-14 External View ----------------------------------------------------------------------1-14 CDRH Act ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 ADF -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14 Laser Safety ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 Reader ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14 Handling of Laser System ---------------------------------------------------- 7 Front view, Left side -----------------------------------------------------------------------1-15 Turn Power Switch ON -------------------------------------------------------- 8...
  • Page 5 Feed Control --------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-21 Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-48 Read Control --------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-23 Laser ON/OFF control --------------------------------------------------------------------2-48 Reverse Control ----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-23 Horizontal scanning synchronous control -------------------------------------------2-49 Feed/Delivery of Original ----------------------------------------------------------------2-25 Vertical Scanning Synchronous Control ---------------------------------------------2-50 Original Detection--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-25 Laser scanner motor control ------------------------------------------------------------2-50 Jam Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-26 APC(Auto Power Control) Control -----------------------------------------------------2-51 Service Tasks ----------------------------------------------------------------------2-26 BD correction control ---------------------------------------------------------------------2-52 Dustproof shutter control-----------------------------------------------------------------2-52...
  • Page 6 Major Components ------------------------------------------------------------------------2-86 Periodically Replaced Parts ----------------------------------------------------------- 2-124 Controls -----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-87 Consumable Parts ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-124 Periodical Servicing --------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-124 Fixing Temperature Control (temperature control) --------------------------------2-87 MEAP ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-125 Standby Temperature Control ----------------------------------------------------------2-88 Print Temperature Control ---------------------------------------------------------------2-89 Preparation for Using SSO-H ------------------------------------------------ 2-125 Down Sequence Control -----------------------------------------------------------------2-91 Outline -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-125 Pre-fixing arch level control -------------------------------------------------------------2-96...
  • Page 7 Login Service Installation Procedure ----------------------------------------------- 2-162 Integrated Authentication Function -------------------------------------------------- 2-193 Login Service Uninstallation Procedure -------------------------------------------- 2-163 Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] System Application Management ------------------------------------------- 2-163 Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-195 Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Password authentication --------------------------------------------------------------- 2-163 Logged in ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-196 RLS Authentication ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-164...
  • Page 8 Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button ------------------------------------- 2-229 Reader Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-3 Enabling [Manual Update] Button of Remote UI --------------------------------- 2-229 Printer (Front Side) ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-4 System Management Operations ------------------------------------------- 2-230 Printer (Rear Side) ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5 Internal View --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-6 Various Setting --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-230 List of Main Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-6 Displaying Logs -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-232 Maintenance --------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-235...
  • Page 9 Removing the Right Upper Cover --------------------------------------------4-40 Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit ----------------------------------------4-71 Preparation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-40 Procedure ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-71 Pre-check items ----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-40 Copyboard Glass Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------4-72 Procedure ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-41 Removing the CIS Unit ----------------------------------------------------------4-75 Removing the Right Cover Unit -----------------------------------------------4-42 Before Replacing the Scanner Unit (Reader side CIS) --------------------------4-75 Preparation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-42 Preparation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-75 Procedure ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-42...
  • Page 10 4-101 Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit ------------------ 4-122 Preparation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-101 Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-122 Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Guide Unit --------- 4-123 Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-101 After Replacing --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-102 Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-123 Removing the HDD ------------------------------------------------------------- 4-103 Removing the Registration Drive Unit ------------------------------------- 4-126 Preparation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-103 Preparation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-126...
  • Page 11 Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-144 Cleaning the Registration Front Guide ------------------------------------ 4-175 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-175 /Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Cleaning the Registration Roller/Pre-registration Roller -------------- 4-176 /Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller --------------------------------------------- 4-148 Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-176 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Guide ---------------------------------- 4-177 Preparation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-148 Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-148 Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-177...
  • Page 12 5-21 Overview of Version Upgrade ----------------------------------------------------------6-18 Download mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-19 Multi-purpose Tray Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side; Software Writing System Software -----------------------------------------------------------------6-19 Adjsutment) -------------------------------------------------------------------------5-21 System Software Configuration --------------------------------------------------------6-19 Multi-purpose Tray Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side; Software Note on download process --------------------------------------------------------------6-20 Adjsutment) -------------------------------------------------------------------------5-21 Version Upgrade via SST -------------------------------------------------------6-20 Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (1st side/normal paper) -----------------5-22...
  • Page 13 Error Code List -----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-72 LOG2SRVR ------------------------------------------------------------------------6-95 Controller Self Diagnosis -------------------------------------------------- 6-80 Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-95 Controller Self Diagnosis --------------------------------------------------------6-80 LOG-TRIG --------------------------------------------------------------------------6-96 Introduction ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-80 Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-96 Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-80 HIT-STS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-97 Layout Drawing -----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-81 HIT-STS2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------6-97 Basic Flowchart ----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-82 DEFAULT ---------------------------------------------------------------------------6-97 Prerequisite ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-82 Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-97 Operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------6-83 SYSLOG ----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-97 Boot System Error Diagnosis -----------------------------------------------------------6-83...
  • Page 14 Overview ------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2 CCD -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-53 IMG-REG ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-67 Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2 DENS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-71 Entering Service Mode ----------------------------------------------------------- 8-2 BLANK ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-75 Service Mode Menu --------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2 V-CONT --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-75 Service mode item explanations ----------------------------------------------- 8-2 PASCAL --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-80 I/O information enhancement --------------------------------------------------- 8-3 COLOR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-81 Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description ----------------------------- 8-3 HV-TR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-87 COPIER>...
  • Page 15 Serial Interface Kit-K2 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 --------------9-9 INT-FACE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-178 LCNS-TR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-178 Points to Note at Installation ---------------------------------------------------- 9-9 TEST ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-188 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------- 9-9 PG ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-188 Installation Outline Drawing ----------------------------------------------------- 9-9 NETWORK -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-190 Checking the Contents ----------------------------------------------------------- 9-9 COUNTER ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-191...
  • Page 16 Checking the Contents ----------------------------------------------------------9-41 General Circuit Diagram (7/10)-------------------------------------------------------------X General Circuit Diagram (8/10)------------------------------------------------------------ XI Installation Procedure ------------------------------------------------------------9-42 General Circuit Diagram (9/10)----------------------------------------------------------- XII Backup Procedure (Reference) -----------------------------------------------9-43 General Circuit Diagram (10/10) -------------------------------------------------------- XIII User Settings Batch Export Procedure -----------------------------------------------9-43 Backup Data ------------------------------------------------------------------- XIV Backing Up MEAP Applications --------------------------------------------------------9-43 Detail of HDD partition ------------------------------------------------------- XX Stopping, Disabling, Downloading Disabled Licenses for, and Uninstalling...

  • Page 17: Safety Precautions

    Safety Precautions ■ CDRH Act ■ Laser Safety ■ Handling of Laser System ■ Turn Power Switch ON ■ Power Supply ■ Safety of Toner ■ Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery imageRUNNER ADVANCE ■ Notes Before Servicing C351/C350/C250 Series ■...
  • Page 18 CDRH Act Laser Safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drug Administration put Laser beam radiation may pose a danger to the human body. A laser scanner mounted on into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply the machine is sealed with the protection housing and external cover to prevent the laser to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products beam from leaking to the outside.
  • Page 19 Handling of Laser System When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power. If you must service while the power is turned on, be sure to keep the followings: - Do not use a screwdriver or tools that have a high level of reflectance in the laser path. - Remove watches and rings before starting the work.
  • Page 20 Turn Power Switch ON CAUTION: Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control energy saver whichaccess is made to the HDD. If deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602). key.

  • Page 21: About Toner

    Power Supply Safety of Toner About Toner The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye. 1. As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock. If an extension cord must be used, however, use one for local rated voltage and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the Do not throw toner into fire.
  • Page 22 Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Points to Note at Cleaning CAUTION: CAUTION: When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
  • Page 23 Notes On Assembly/Disassembly Points to Note when Tightening a Screw For reduction in weight, thin plates are used in some parts of this machine. Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device. In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark near it as shown in the figure below, strongly 1.

  • Page 24: Product Overview

    Product Overview ■ Product Lineup ■ Features ■ Specifications ■ Parts Name Product Overview...

  • Page 25: Host Machine Configuration

    Product Overview > Product Lineup > Host machine > Model type Product Lineup ■ Host machine configuration Configuration Reader+ADF+Printer Host machine T-1-1 ■ Model type imageRUNNER ADVANCE C351/C350 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C250 Print Speed 35 ppm 25 ppm T-1-2 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C351/C350/C250 Series Underlined (2-digit) numeric figures indicate print speed (ppm: print per minute).

  • Page 26: Pickup / Delivery / Image Reading System Options

    1 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C351/C350/ C250 Series 2 ADF Access Handle-A1 3 Cassette Feeding Unit-AG1 4 Cassette Feeding Unit-AH1 5 Canon FL Cassette-AT1 6 Staple Finisher-S1 7 Cassette Heater Unit-39 8 Copy Card Reader-F1 To install the Copy Card Reader-F1, the Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit-B4 is required.

  • Page 27: Function Expansion System Options

    Product Overview > Product Lineup > Option > Function expansion system options ■ Function expansion system options ● Hardware Products Product name Remarks and condition 1 Super G3 FAX Board-AN1 2 HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 3 eM Controller-C1 4 Serial Interface Kit-K2 The following options cannot be used in combination with this equipment.
  • Page 28 Product Overview > Product Lineup > Option > Function expansion system options ● License Products At the time of installation, obtain the license number according to the license certificate included. Then, enter the obtained license number from the Control Panel of the machine, so that the applicable functions are enabled.

  • Page 29: Service Mode

    Product Overview > Features > Service Feature > Service Mode Features Service Feature ■ Service Mode Product Features The description of each service mode item is displayed as well. Pickup Roller / Separation Roller / Separation Pad Improved serviceability • Easier replacement Toner Container •...

  • Page 30: Improved Upgrading Operability

    Attachment-B4 aabbbb aa : location bbbb : jam code Staple Finisher-S1 ADF Access Handle-A1 Cassette Heater Unit-39 F-1-7 Canon FL Cassette-AT1 Cassette Feeding Unit-AH1 Cassette Feeding Unit-AG1 F-1-6 Product Overview > Features > Service Feature > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications...

  • Page 31: Error Code

    Product Overview > Features > Service Feature > Improved replacing major parts ● Error Code ■ Improved replacing major parts In addition to "Error Code", "Location Code" is displayed on the screen when an error occurs. To replace major parts, a simple replacement procedure in which fixing screws do not have to be removed is introduced.

  • Page 32: Specifications

    Product Overview > Specifications > Weight and Size Specifications Item Specifications Paper size (Multi-purpose Tray) A4, B5, A5, LGL, LTR, EXE, STMT, K16, Postcard, Envelope and Custom size (98.4 x 148 to 215.9 x 355.6 mm) Specifications Pickup capacity Cassette: 550 sheets (80 g/m Multi-purpose Tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m Duplexing method Through-pass duplex...

  • Page 33: Productivity (Print Speed)

    Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) 1-10 Productivity (Print speed) imageRUNNER ADVANCE C351/C350 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C250 Paper type Size Cassette Multi-purpose Tray Cassette Multi-purpose Tray 1-sided 2-sided 1-sided 2-sided 1-sided 2-sided 1-sided 2-sided Thin paper (60 to 63 g/m Plain paper1 (64 to 75 g/m Recycled paper1/Color paper (64 to 75 g/m B5/16K...

  • Page 34: Paper Type

    Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup 1-11 Paper type Following shows the types of usable papers. See the table below for the custom paper size. Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm) Custom paper size1 148.0 to 190.4 98.4 to 216.0 Custom paper size2-1 190.5 to 209.9...
  • Page 35 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup 1-12 Paper Type Size Feeding direction Width direction Pickup position Auto Duplex 2-Side Setting Multi CST1 CST2 CST3 CST4 (mm) (mm) Plain paper3 (91 to 105 g/m 297.0 210.0 Recycled paper3 (91 to 105 g/m ）...
  • Page 36 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup 1-13 Paper Type Size Feeding direction Width direction Pickup position Auto Duplex 2-Side Setting Multi CST1 CST2 CST3 CST4 (mm) (mm) Pre-Punched paper 297.0 210.0 LTRR 279.4 215.9 Custom paper size1 148.0 to 190.4 98.4 to 216.0 Custom paper size2-1...

  • Page 37: External View

    Product Overview > Parts Name > External View > Reader 1-14 Parts Name ■ Reader External View ■ ADF F-1-9 Original Tray ADF Base Feeder Cover ADF Rear Cover Side Guide Plate F-1-10 Copyboard Glass Unit Reader Rear Cover 1 Reader Rear Cover 2 Reader Motor Cover 1-14...

  • Page 38: Front View, Left Side

    Product Overview > Parts Name > External View > Front view, Left side 1-15 ■ Front view, Left side Front Cover Cassette [15] [14] [16] Face Cover Left Lower Cover Face Cover Left Upper Cover [13] Delivery Tray Delivery Cover Reverse Tray [10] Upper Cover...

  • Page 39: Rear View, Right Side

    Product Overview > Parts Name > External View > Rear view, Right side 1-16 ■ Rear view, Right side Rear Cover 1 Rear Cover 2 [12] Environment Heater Cover Right Lower Cover [11] Multi-purpose Tray Lower Cover Right Front Cover [10] [13] Main Power Switch Cover...

  • Page 40: Cross Sectional View

    Product Overview > Parts Name > Cross Sectional View 1-17 Cross Sectional View ■ Front Inner [10] [11] F-1-13 [12] Front Inner Right Cover Front Inner Lower Cover [13] Front Inner Upper Cover [16] [15] [14] F-1-14 1-17 Product Overview > Parts Name > Cross Sectional View...

  • Page 41: Power Switch

    Product Overview > Parts Name > Operation > Power Switch 1-18 Operation ■ Power Switch ADF Unit Pickup Roller Separation Roller Feed Roller ● Types of Power Switches Separation Pad Delivery Roller Original Tray ADF Base Platen Guide [10] Reader Unit [11] Copyboard Glass [12]...

  • Page 42: Description Of Control Panel

    Product Overview > Parts Name > Operation > Description of Control Panel 1-19 ● Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch ■ Description of Control Panel • Be sure to turn OFF the Main Power Switch when turning off the power. ●...

  • Page 43: Main Menu

    Product Overview > Parts Name > Operation > Description of Control Panel 1-20 ● Main Menu ● Settings / Registration Menu [10] F-1-18 Name Remarks F-1-17 Preferences Name Remarks Adjustment / Maintenance Copy Function Settings Super G3 FAX Board-AN1 is required. Set Destination Scan and Send Management Settings...

  • Page 44: Technical Explanation

    Technical Explanation ■ Basic Configuration ■ Original Exposure and Feed System ■ Main Controller ■ Laser Exposure System ■ Image Formation System ■ Fixing System ■ Pickup / Feed System ■ External Auxiliary System ■ MEAP ■ Embedded RDS ■ Updater ■...

  • Page 45: Functional Configuration

    Technical Explanation > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration Basic Configuration Functional Configuration This machine consists of 6 major blocks: Original Exposure and Feed System, Controller System, Laser Exposure System, Image Formation System, Fixing System, and Pickup Feed System. Original Exposure and Feed System Reader Delivery Fixing...
  • Page 46 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Specifications/controls/functions Original Exposure and Feed System Item Specification/function ADF original tray capacity A4/LTR-R: 50 sheets (80 g/m LGL: 30 sheets (80 g/m Construction ADF original processing mode 1-sided original processing 2-sided original processing ADF original size detection ■...

  • Page 47: Major Components

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Major Components ■ Major Components ● ADF unit Following shows major components of ADF unit. ● Reader Unit Following shows major components of reader unit. 1) Layout Drawing of Major Parts Drive Pulley Separation Pad Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
  • Page 48 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Construction > Major Components 2) Layout Drawing of Sensors Item Notation Specification/function ADF Motor Pulse Motor: Feeds originals. PS03 Disengagement Solenoid When reverse feeding in the upward direction, disengages the roller from the Delivery Reverse Roller. Document Sensor Photo Interrupter: Detects whether an original is present.

  • Page 49: Basic Operation

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > Basic Sequence Basic Operation 3) The Reader Motor activates and moves the carriage to the right. 4) After the CIS HP Sensor (PS01) is turned OFF, the carriage moves the designated ■...
  • Page 50 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > Basic Sequence ● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (Book mode) ● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (ADF mode) Start ADF scan CIS, AFE ON CIS, AFE ON Black shading is executed Black shading is executed LED ON...

  • Page 51: Adf Operation Mode

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > ADF Operation Mode ■ ADF Operation Mode ADF has 4 operation modes. Operation mode names and outline of operations and associated print modes are given in the following table: Operation mode name Outline of operation Associated print mode...
  • Page 52 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > ADF Operation Mode ● Single-sided original reading • Operation of single-sided original reading (2 originals) Single-sided reading operation Single-sided reading operation (when 2 sheet of original is placed) 2/2 (when 2 sheet of original is placed) 1/2 - Setting of original - Start of reading of the front side...
  • Page 53 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > ADF Operation Mode 2-10 ● Double-sided original reading • Operation of double-sided original reading (2 originals) Duplex reading operation Duplex reading operation (when 2 sheet of original is placed) (when 2 sheet of original is placed) - Feed of the 1st Sheet - Feed to the reverse point...
  • Page 54 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > ADF Operation Mode 2-11 Duplex reading operation Duplex reading operation (when 2 sheet of original is placed) (when 2 sheet of original is placed) - Delivery of the 1st sheet Waiting for reading of the front side - Re-pickup of the 2nd Sheet - End of reading of the back side of...
  • Page 55 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Basic Operation > ADF Operation Mode 2-12 Duplex reading operation (when 2 sheet of original is placed) - Idle feed of the 2nd Sheet & engagement of Delivery Roller - Passing of the 2nd Sheet reading position - Delivery of the 2nd sheet &...

  • Page 56: Reader Unit Controls

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Reader Unit controls > Original Detection 2-13 Reader Unit controls ● Reader Motor Control The rotation/stopping and rotation direction/speed of Reader Motor (M01) are controlled ■ Scanner Drive Control based on signals from the ASIC. ●...

  • Page 57: Image Processing

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > Overview 2-14 Image Processing 6ch CIS 4ch CIS Control Signal 2 Drive IC ■ Overview Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor The image processing is executed by the CIS Unit (AFE) and the Main Controller PCB. Sensor Sensor The functions related to the image processing are shown below:...

  • Page 58: Image Processing By The Cis Unit (Afe)

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > Image Processing by the CIS Unit (AFE) 2-15 ■ Image Processing by the CIS Unit (AFE) Component Function Illuminates the original. ● Contact Image Sensor (CIS) Light guide Illuminates the entire image line with the LED light.
  • Page 59 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > Image Processing by the Main Controller PCB (Reader ASIC) 2-16 ● Analog Control Performed by the CIS ■ Image Processing by the Main Controller PCB (Reader ASIC) The flow of analog image processing performed by the contact image sensor (CIS) is as ●...

  • Page 60: Shading Correction

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > Image Processing by the Main Controller PCB (Reader ASIC) 2-17 ● Shading Correction White shading (for stream reading) The shading correction of stream reading is performed using the white level adjustment value Due to the characteristics of each of the elements in the CIS, variations occur in the reading (factory adjustment value).
  • Page 61 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > Image Processing by the Main Controller PCB (Reader ASIC) 2-18 ● Dust Detection Control 1) Before the original is fed, the Platen Guide is read through the Reading Glass to detect points where there is a possibility of dust.
  • Page 62 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Image Processing > Image Processing by the Main Controller PCB (Reader ASIC) 2-19 Dust Detection Preventive Process If dust is detected in paper of the last job, the reading position of the following stream reading jobs is changed to avoid the dust.

  • Page 63: Control Of Adf

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Pickup Control 2-20 Control of ADF ● Pickup operation (1-sided/2-sided stream reading) When the key to start printing is pressed while an original is placed on the Original Tray, ■...

  • Page 64: Feed Control

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Feed Control 2-21 ■ Feed Control ● At 1-sided stream reading The drive of the ADF Motor (M02) rotates the Feed Roller, and feeds an original to the reading position.
  • Page 65 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Feed Control 2-22 ● At 2-sided stream reading The drive (clockwise rotation) of the ADF Motor (M02) rotates the Feed Roller, and feeds an original. When the Document End Sensor (PS02) is turned ON, the ADF Motor (M02) is stopped to stop the original.

  • Page 66: Basic Operation

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Reverse Control 2-23 ■ Read Control ■ Reverse Control When the edge of an original reaches the reading position, stream reading is started by ● Basic operation sending the image leading edge signal to the host machine.
  • Page 67 Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Reverse Control 2-24 ● Reverse/Feed Counterclockwise Rotation The drive (counterclockwise rotation) of the ADF Motor (M02) rotates the Feed Roller, and feeds an original. When the Document End Sensor (PS02) is turned ON, the ADF Motor (M02) is stopped to stop the original.

  • Page 68: Original Size Detection

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Control of ADF > Original Detection 2-25 ■ Feed/Delivery of Original ■ Original Detection ● Basic Operation ● Detection of presence/absence of original After stream reading on the Copyboard Glass is completed, the Feed Roller rotates to send As the actuator is pushed up by placing an original on the Original Tray, the Original Sensor an original to the Delivery Tray.

  • Page 69: Jam Detection

    Technical Explanation > Original Exposure and Feed System > Service Tasks > Actions at Parts Replacement 2-26 Service Tasks ■ Jam Detection This machine detects jam using the Document End Sensor (PS02) and the Document ■ Periodically Replaced Parts Sensor (PS03). The check timing to detect jam is already stored in the Main Controller PCB, None.

  • Page 70: Configuration / Function

    Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Overview > Configuration / Function 2-27 Main Controller Item Function Main Controller PCB System Control / Memory Control / Printer Output Image Processing Control, Reader Image Input Processing, Card Reader Connection I/F, Overview Image Processing for FAX, USB Expansion HUB Connection I/F Temporarily saving image data Capacity 1GB (for controller control) + 512MB (for image processing control) ■...

  • Page 71: Main Controller Pcb

    Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Overview > Main controller PCB 2-28 ■ Main controller PCB Function USB I/F (Device) UI: Control Panel I/F USB I/F (Host) Control J7017 J7011 Panel LAN I/F Image Data ECO PCB Analyzer PCB TPM PCB FLASH PCB FAN: Fan I/F J7019...

  • Page 72: Boot Sequence

    Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Overview > Boot Sequence 2-29 ■ Boot Sequence Related error codes (major error codes): Error codes Error description Power Supply Switch ON E602 HDD error 0001 HDD detection error [ ] : Program storage location HDD failed to be Ready, or HDD was not formatted.

  • Page 73: Shutdown Sequence

    Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Overview > Shutdown Sequence 2-30 ■ Shutdown Sequence Before shutting OFF the power supply, it is necessary to perform the HDD completion process (for the HDD models only. Purpose: to prevent damage on the HDD) and execute the fixing disengagement operation.

  • Page 74: Network(Advanced Box / Space Client)

    Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Controls > Network(Advanced Box / Space Client) 2-31 Controls ■ SEND ■ Copy Network Reader To DC Controller Reader Image Processing Resolution Conversion Data Conversion Image rotation JPEG Encode JPEG Conversion/Extension Controller Print the Image Image Processing Processing Resolution Conversion...

  • Page 75: Fax Receive

    Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Controls > Fax Receive 2-32 ■ Fax SEND Reader Image Processing Resolution Conversion JBIG・MMR/MH Image rotation Conversion Image Level Cell HDD Writing/ Reading Image Data Buffer (Memory) Main Controller PCB F-2-42 ■ Fax Receive To DC Controller Image Processing Color Space Conversion...

  • Page 76: Setting The Management On The Hard Disk

    Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Setting the Management on the Hard Disk 2-33 Security ● Initializing All Data/Settings Initializing the saved file and the registration information ■ Setting the Management on the Hard Disk This function enables to delete (initialize) the data such as the file saved in the host machine, the registration information of the Address Book and the job log information* In addition to the document data to be accumulated by FAX function, the registration information of the Address Book and the password information of the System Box and the...
  • Page 77 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Security features(encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-34 ■ Security features(encryption key and certificate, password ● Configuration of Security Information The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI.This protection) machine provides the two types of TPM settings.
  • Page 78 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Security features(encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-35 When the TPM setting is OFF, the TPM key is disabled. Thus, the security information is ● Preparation before Installing TPM protected only by the common key.Under this setting, the security information held in this Before installing TPM, ask the user to back up data.Follow the steps below to back up data.
  • Page 79 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Security features(encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-36 ● Before / after introduction 1. Enable the feature The setting neeeds to be specified in Settings / Registration mode (“TPM setting” is set OFF Caution: at the time of shipment from the factory) Setting of “system management encryption number”...
  • Page 80 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Security features(encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-37 2) Click “Yes”, and then reboot this machine. 2. Backup of TPM key Only the USB memory (supported system file: FAT32) can be used as the device for saving backup file of TPM key.
  • Page 81 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Security features(encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-38 3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4 to 12-digit), and then enter the password to Caution: Cause of backup failure confirm the entry. In the case of the following, a message is shown indicating backup failure and its cause.
  • Page 82 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Security features(encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-39 3. Restore of TPM Key Caution: Procedure is about the same as the backup work. Difference between restore work and backup work: Cause of restore failure Rebooting is necessary (turn OFF and then ON the main power) after completion of restore In the case of the following, a message is shown indicating restore failure and its cause.
  • Page 83 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Security features(encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-40 4. Disable the feature List of data to be cleared To set “OFF” for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings]. • Data saved in Inbox (Fax Box/ System Box) •...
  • Page 84 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Security features(encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-41 ● Related Error Code Error Code Error title, description, remedy 0033 TPM error Error Code Error title, description, remedy Description It was detected that data in TPM was inconsistent E746 TPM PCB error Remedy...
  • Page 85 Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > Security features(encryption key and certificate, password protection) 2-42 ● Data to be encrypted / decoded(reference) Error Code Error title, description, remedy 0034 TPM auto recovery error Description The error occurred when clearing HDD while TPM setting was ON Type Application/feature Security information...

  • Page 86: Hdd Encryption Kit (Optional)

    Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Security > HDD Encryption Kit (Optional) 2-43 ■ HDD Encryption Kit (Optional) ● Compatibility among Device, Encryption Board and HDD E602-2000 error may occur if the unmatched authentication information is found between the This option enables to generate the encryption key inside the encryption board and to controller and the HDD encryption board and the encryption board is mounted.The device, encrypt the whole HDD including the system software.

  • Page 87: Periodically Replaced Parts

    Technical Explanation > Main Controller > Service Tasks > Actions at Parts Replacement 2-44 Service Tasks ● Actions against Troubles - Overview Servicing User data Recovery Action ■ Periodically Replaced Parts HDD replacement cleared Replace HDDs 1) Format the HDD Encryption board cleared Install HDD encryption...
  • Page 88 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Overview 2-45 Laser Exposure System Overview Photosensitive Drum Laser exposure system forms the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum by the laser exposure. This system is composed of the laser assembly and the scanner motor assembly that are unified as the laser scanner unit.
  • Page 89 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Overview 2-46 Laser A Laser B F-2-57 [1] Y/M/C/Bk Laser Driver PCB [4] Reflection Mirror [2] BD Circuit [5] Polygon Mirrors [3] Imaging Lens [6] Scanner Motor 2-46 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Overview...
  • Page 90 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Specification > 1-Polygon 4-Laser Method 2-47 Specification ■ 1-Polygon 4-Laser Method This method uses 1 scanner motor (polygon motor) and 4 laser diodes to execute laser Item Description scanning. This method allows to emit the 4 lasers on the multi-facet mirror on one scanner Wavelength 780 to 800nm motor contributing to space-saving.

  • Page 91: Various Controls

    Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Laser ON/OFF control 2-48 Various Controls ■ Laser ON/OFF control ● Purpose ■ Overview Laser light is turned ON / OFF according to the combination of laser control signal. Item Operation description Laser ON / OFF control Laser light is turned ON / OFF according to the combination of...

  • Page 92: Horizontal Scanning Synchronous Control

    Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Horizontal scanning synchronous control 2-49 ■ Horizontal scanning synchronous control BD Sensor ● Purpose To align the writing start position in horizontal scanning direction. DC Controller PCB (UN04) Bk Laser Y/M/C/K ●...

  • Page 93: Laser Scanner Motor Control

    Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Laser scanner motor control 2-50 ■ Vertical Scanning Synchronous Control ■ Laser scanner motor control ● Purpose ● Purpose This is to align the writing start position in vertical scanning direction. This is to rotate the scanner mirror by the specified speed.
  • Page 94 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > APC(Auto Power Control) Control 2-51 ■ APC(Auto Power Control) Control Related error code ● Purpose • E100-0100: BD error This is to make the laser light for 1 line consistent amount. The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once.
  • Page 95 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Dustproof shutter control 2-52 ■ BD correction control ■ Dustproof shutter control ● Purpose ● Purpose This is to correct the displacement of writing start position of each color laser due to the angle This is to prevent the residue toner from sticking to the dust-prevention glass.
  • Page 96 Technical Explanation > Laser Exposure System > Servicing > Actions at Parts Replacement 2-53 Servicing ■ Periodically Replaced Parts None. ■ Consumable Parts None. ■ Periodical Servicing None. Perform as needed. ■ Actions at Parts Replacement • Actions at Laser Scanner Unit Replacement 2-53 Technical Explanation >...
  • Page 97 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications 2-54 Image Formation System ■ Specifications Item Function/Method Photosensitive Material Overview Drum Drum diameter 30mm dia Cleaning Cleaning blade ■ Overview Process speed imageRUNNER ADVANCE C350 : 200 mm/s imageRUNNER ADVANCE C250 : 135 mm/s Drum Heater None Image formation system of this machine uses the Dry, 2-component AC developing for...

  • Page 98: Print Process

    Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Overview > Print Process 2-55 ■ Parts Configuration ■ Print Process ● Major Parts ● Overview Hopper Unit Delivery Fixing block 7.Fixing ITB cleaning block Transfer block Toner Container 6.Separation 8.ITB cleaning 5.Secondary transfer 4.Primary 4.Primary 4.Primary...
  • Page 99 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Overview > Print Process 2-56 ● Bias Types Static latent image 1 Primary To charge the surface of photosensitive drum to be uniformed formation block charging negative potential The following 5 types of bias are used with this machine. 2 Laser To create static latent image on the surface of photosensitive Bias...

  • Page 100: Primary Charging

    Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary Charging 2-57 Controls ■ Primary Charging ● Overview ■ Overview This machine uses the roller charging method for primary charging. Primary charging Primary charging bias control Photosensitive Drum Image stabilization control D-max control PASCAL control D-half control...

  • Page 101: Drum Unit (Developing/Drum)

    Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit (Developing/Drum) 2-58 ● Primary Charging Bias Control ■ Drum Unit (Developing/Drum) DC charging (no AC charging) is a distinguishing feature of the primary charging of this ● Drum Unit Overview machine.

  • Page 102: Developing Bias Control

    Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit (Developing/Drum) 2-59 ● Developing Overview/ Drive Configuration ● Developing bias control A toner image is formed on the Photosensitive Drum by attaching toner to the Developing Developing Cylinder Cylinder. Control description Developing Cylinder Clutch The developing bias (AC, DC negative), which has been generated on the Developing...
  • Page 103 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit (Developing/Drum) 2-60 ● Drum Overview ● Drive Configuration Photosensitive Drum Photosensitive Drum CL Drum Motor Bk Drum _ ITB Motor Cleaning Screw Cleaning Screw Cleaning Blade Cleaning Primary Charging Roller Blade Primary Charging Roller F-2-78...
  • Page 104 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit (Developing/Drum) 2-61 ● Drum Unit Detection Operation of the host machine The machine is stopped and “No drum unit” is displayed on the Control Panel at the same Whether the Drum Unit is installed or not is detected. time.
  • Page 105 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit (Developing/Drum) 2-62 ● Drum Unit Life Detection Pre-toner Low Alarm Display to prompt Completion of Life of the Drum Unit (Photosensitive Drum) is detected. replacement replacement Timing • Y/M/C/K-DRM-LF (*1) 7 days after pre-toner low When the Drum Unit is This machine does not have a Photosensitive Drum film thickness detection mechanism...
  • Page 106 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer/Separation 2-63 ■ Transfer/Separation ● Drive Configuration Developing Motor Bk Drum _ ITB Motor ● Overview The ITB Unit transfers a toner image on the Photosensitive Drum onto the ITB. Then, the toner image is transferred on the paper.
  • Page 107 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer/Separation 2-64 ● Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Control ● ATVC Control The Primary Transfer Roller is usually disengaged. Primary Transfer ATVC The transfer voltage required to prevent transfer failure due to environmental changes and to Timing of engagement obtain the target transfer current value is set.
  • Page 108 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer/Separation 2-65 Secondary Transfer ATVC ● Primary Transfer Bias Control The transfer voltage required to prevent transfer failure due to environmental changes or The primary transfer bias is divided into each color (Y, M, C, Bk) to be generated on the paper type and to obtain the target transfer current value is set.

  • Page 109: Itb Cleaning

    Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer/Separation 2-66 ● Secondary Transfer Bias Control ● ITB Cleaning Toner on the ITB is transferred to a paper. Residual toner on the ITB is removed. The secondary transfer bias, which has been generated on the Secondary Transfer High- voltage PCB (UN02), is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
  • Page 110 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer/Separation 2-67 ● Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Cleaning Control ● Separation Soiling at the back of the sheet caused by soiling of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller can This control separates paper from the ITB by elastic force of the paper (curvature separation be prevented.

  • Page 111: Drum Cleaning

    Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-68 ■ Drum Cleaning ■ Image Stabilization Control ● Drum cleaning control ● Overview To clean residual toner on the photosensitive drum Image failure due to change of the environment or deterioration of the Photosensitive Drum is Residual toner on the drum is scraped by the drum cleaning blade.
  • Page 112 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-69 ● Control timing ● D-max Control Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the environment and The optimal laser output is determined. condition of image formation parts. Following shows the control items at each sequence and estimated downtime.
  • Page 113 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-70 Start Main Controller PCB (UN81) Output of patch pattern data DC Controller PCB (UN04) Patch pattern is created Developing Laser output Cylinder Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front) (UN31) Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Rear) (UN32) Primary Patch scanning...
  • Page 114 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-71 ● PASCAL control NOTE: Gradation density characteristics on the image are stabilized. The following 3 types of patch patterns are formed with this control: This control is executed when the following is selected in UI menu: Auto Adjust Gradation > •...
  • Page 115 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-72 ● D-half Control Start Optimal image gradation is determined. Main Controller PCB (UN81) Control timing Output of patch pattern data 1) During installation and when replacing the Drum Unit 2) At last rotation on a specified print basis (1000 sheets or more) DC Controller PCB (UN04) 3) At last rotation when PASCAL control is executed...
  • Page 116 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-73 Start Main Controller PCB (UN81) Output of patch pattern data DC Controller PCB (UN04) Patch pattern is created Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Y) D-half correction table (Front,Rear)(UN31,UN32) Actual gradation Registration Patch scanning...
  • Page 117 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-74 The flow to calculate correction value for ARCDAT control ● ARCDAT Control (Automatic and Reciprocal Color Density Adjustment Technology) Start While reducing downtime, the ideal gradation characteristics are realized. Main Controller PCB (UN81) Control timing Output of patch pattern data...
  • Page 118 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-75 Start Main Controller PCB (UN81) Output of patch pattern data DC Controller PCB (UN04) Patch pattern is created Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front,Rear)(UN31,UN32) Reference data for Registration example) Patch scanning ARCDAT of copy pattern...
  • Page 119 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control 2-76 ● Color Displacement Correction Control Control description 2: Color displacement correction based on temperature prediction Uneven exposure of the Laser Scanner Unit and color displacement caused by uneven 1) The degree of color displacement is measured based on the operating condition (mainly rotation of the drum or the ITB is corrected.

  • Page 120: Toner Supply Assembly

    Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Assembly 2-77 ■ Toner Supply Assembly ● Toner Head Assembly Opening This control automatically opens/closes the head assembly of toner container. ● Overview Toner is supplied from the Toner Container to the Developing Assembly. The toner level of the Control timing Toner Container is detected at the same time.
  • Page 121 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Assembly 2-78 ● Toner Log Detection ● ATR Control (Auto Toner Replenishment) A Toner Log is detected. Toner is supplied to the Developing Assembly to make the developer (toner + carrier) in the assembly to meet at an ideal ratio.
  • Page 122 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Assembly 2-79 ● Toner Supply Control Toner Log Connector Bottle Rotation Sensor Toner is supplied from the Toner Container to the Developing Assembly. (Y,M,C,Bk) (Y,M,C,Bk) (UN38,39,40,41) (PS6,7,8,9) This machine uses a Toner Container that has a bellows mechanism at the edge. The Toner Bottle is rotated and the bellows section is operated by driving the Bottle Motor.
  • Page 123 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Assembly 2-80 The Bottle Rotation Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (PS06/PS07/PS08/PS09) starts while it is turned ON ● Toner Level Detection at the time of feeding. Driving the Bottle Motor (YM) (M09) or the Bottle Motor (CK) (M10) Detection Prior delivery alarm Display Remaining Toner...

  • Page 124: Waste Toner Feeding Area

    Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feeding Area 2-81 ● Detection of the completion of toner replacement ■ Waste Toner Feeding Area Detection of the completion of replacement ● Overview Detection timing When a replacement of Toner Container is detected To feed waste toner of the drum cleaning unit and the ITB cleaning unit to the Waste Toner Alarm Code 10-0100...
  • Page 125 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feeding Area 2-82 ● Waste Toner Container Full Level Detection Detection Auto delvry alarm/Waste Toner Full level of waste toner To detect toner level accumulated in the waste toner case. description Container preparation warning (*1) Detection...

  • Page 126: Other Controls

    Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Controls > Warm-up Rotation 2-83 ■ Other Controls ■ Warm-up Rotation ● Special Controls ● Operation overview This machine has the following sequences as the special sequence. This operation is performed to check the status of sensor/motor at power-on or recovery from sleep mode.
  • Page 127 Technical Explanation > Image Formation System > Service Tasks > Periodical Servicing 2-84 Service Tasks ■ Periodically Replaced Parts None. ■ Consumable Parts Parts name Parts Quantity Estimated life Remarks number ITB Unit FM1-A153 1 150,000 sheets Secondary transfer outer Roller FC0-5848 150,000 sheets Waste Toner Container FM0-0015...
  • Page 128 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Overview > Specifications 2-85 Fixing System ■ Specifications Item Function/method Fixing method On-demand fixing Overview Fixing speed iR-ADV 35-ppm 1/1 speed 200 mm/sec C350 machine 2/3 speed 135 mm/sec ■ Features 1/2 speed 100 mm/sec iR-ADV 25-ppm 1/1 speed...
  • Page 129 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Overview > Major Components 2-86 ■ Major Components Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (PS13) Fixing Heater (H01) Pressure Roller Fixing Thermoswitch (TP01) Delivery Sensor (PS12) Sub Thermistor (Rear) (TH02) Fixing Film Main Thermistor (TH01) F-2-115 Sub Thermistor (Front) (TH03) F-2-116...

  • Page 130: Fixing Temperature Control (Temperature Control)

    Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing Temperature Control (temperature control) 2-87 Controls ● Standby Temperature Control This is a control to pre-heat the Fixing Assembly to reduce time to start printing. ■ Fixing Temperature Control (temperature control) •...
  • Page 131 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Standby Temperature Control 2-88 ■ Standby Temperature Control ● Flying Start Purpose: Fixing To reduce time to print the first sheet (FCOT). temperature STBY INTR PRNT Startup conditions: • When Control Panel Numeric Keypad/Touch Panel is pressed Flaying start control •...

  • Page 132: Print Temperature Control

    Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Print Temperature Control 2-89 ■ Print Temperature Control ● Print Temperature Control To set optimal target temperature to prevent fixing failure or offset, and keep the specified target temperature during printing A. Setting the target temperature A target temperature is determined according to the paper type/size, time which elapsed from when fixing temperature control (including standby control) finished the last time, and fixing temperature when startup control started.
  • Page 133 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Print Temperature Control 2-90 ● Target temperature during printing Related Service Mode: The control temperature is determined according to the fixing mode and fixing temperature (Lv.1) COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG at the start of Startup control. 11 fixing modes are available according to the selected pickup >...
  • Page 134 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Down Sequence Control 2-91 ■ Down Sequence Control Purpose: To prevent fixing offset and deterioration of the Fixing Film by controlling temperature ● Down sequence when feeding small-size paper increase at a non paper feed area at continuous printing of small-size paper (paper that has smaller than A4R/LTR of width-direction length) Fixing Film Pressure Roller...
  • Page 135 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Down Sequence Control 2-92 Detected temperature Detected temperature Paper Paper Speed Paper type Speed Paper type size size 1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage 1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage stage stage A4 </= *...
  • Page 136 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Down Sequence Control 2-93 Detected temperature Detected temperature Paper Paper Speed Paper type Speed Paper type size size 1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage 1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage stage stage A5 </= *...
  • Page 137 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Down Sequence Control 2-94 Termination condition: ● Down sequence when switching paper size The termination condition is when the job ends. Purpose: When feeding a sheet with a wider width than a preceding sheet during continuous printing, Related Service Mode: temperature at the non paper-feed area of the preceding sheet increases, and it can cause •...
  • Page 138 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Down Sequence Control 2-95 Termination conditions: ● Film unit engagement / disengagement control • When the highest of the temperatures detected by the Sub Thermistor (Rear) (TH02) The Fixing Film Unit is disengaged from the Pressure Roller under a specific conditionfor and the Sub Thermistor (Front) (TH03) has become the specified temperature (150 the purpose of preventing deformation of the Fixing Film/Pressure Roller due to heat deg C) or less.

  • Page 139: Pre-Fixing Arch Level Control

    Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Pre-fixing arch level control 2-96 ■ Pre-fixing arch level control <Pressure state> <Pressure Release state> Purpose: Fixing Slit Pressure Release To prevent image failure and feeding failure Sensor (PS13) Since the feeding speed of the Pressure Roller and that of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller are not the same when a sheet is fed to the Fixing Assembly, image failure, paper wrinkle, image stretching, etc.

  • Page 140: Arch Sensor Control

    Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Arch Sensor control 2-97 ■ Arch Sensor control Operation: Fixing Film The Arch Sensor (PS11) detects a paper arch between the transfer nip and fixing nip to Pressure Roller change the drive speed of the Fixing Motor. 1) When the paper's leading edge goes over 65 mm from the secondary transfer nip area by 65 mm, drive speed of the Fixing Motor is reduced by 1.0% against the process Fixing Motor...

  • Page 141: Protection Function

    Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Controls > Protection function 2-98 Sensor : OFF Sensor : ON ■ Protection function Slack of paper is small Slack of paper is large Clearing Code Description of error E001 Fixing Assembly high temperature error A001 Main Thermistor detected a temperature of 265 deg C or higher for 0.1 PS11 sec or longer (software).
  • Page 142 Technical Explanation > Fixing System > Service Tasks > Periodical Servicing 2-99 Service Tasks Clearing Code Description of error ■ Periodically Replaced Parts E009 Film unit engagement / disengagement error 0001 The pressure release sensor signal could not be detected at pressure None.

  • Page 143: Parts Configuration

    Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-100 Pickup / Feed System ■ Parts Configuration ● Rollers Layout drawing Overview ■ Specifications Item Description Paper storage method Front-loading method Pickup method Cassette Retard separation Multi-purpose Tray Retard separation Stacking capacity Cassette...
  • Page 144 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-101 ● Sensors Layout Drawing ● Route of Drive PS14 PS12 PS11 PS01 SL02 PS04 PS05 PS03 PS10 SW09 PS20 PS02 PS18 F-2-128 PS01 Duplex Sensor PS11 Arch Sensor F-2-129 PS02 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor PS12 Delivery Sensor...

  • Page 145: Paper Path

    Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper Path 2-102 ■ Paper Path Reversing point Delivery point Pickup from manual feeder Pickup from cassette F-2-130 2-102 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper Path...
  • Page 146 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Overview 2-103 Controls ■ Overview Area Detection/Control Cassette Pickup Pickup Retry Control Paper Detection Control Assembly Paper Size Detection Control Paper Level Detection Control Lifter Control Reverse Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Retry Control Paper Size Detection /Duplex Assembly Pickup Assembly...

  • Page 147: Cassette Pickup Assembly

    Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly 2-104 ■ Cassette Pickup Assembly ● Pickup Retry Control If the Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor (PS05) is not turned ON within a specified period of time ● Overview after the start of pickup operation of the top paper, operation of the Cassette 1 Multi-purpose Paper inside a cassette is lifted up by the Lifter Plate.
  • Page 148 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly 2-105 ● Paper Size Detection Control A5-R The paper size in the cassette is automatically detected by the "Cassette 1 Size Switch STMT-R (SW09)" after the position of the Guide Plate is adjusted and the cassette is installed in the host machine.
  • Page 149 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly 2-106 Paper size*1 All modes AB configuration Inch-configuration AK configuration A5-R 210.0 STMT-R 215.9 B5-R 257.0 Paper load error Paper load error EXEC-R 267.0 Paper load error 16K-R 270.0 Paper load error...
  • Page 150 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly 2-107 ● Paper Level Detection Control Cassette 1 Paper Lifting Plate Surface Sensor Detection Lever Paper level inside the cassette is detected by the sensors shown in the following table. (PS18) Cassette 1 The paper level in the cassette is detected by the Cassette 1 Lifter Motor (M11), Cassette 1...
  • Page 151 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly 2-108 Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor Paper Sensor (PS02) (PS02) Cassette 1 Paper Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor Surface Sensor (PS18) (PS18) Paper Paper Paper Paper Cassette 1 Paper Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor...

  • Page 152: Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Assembly

    Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly 2-109 ● Paper Detection Control ■ Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly Paper is detected by the Cassette 1 Size Switch (SW09), Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor ● Overview (PS18) and Cassette 1 Paper Sensor (PS02).

  • Page 153: Paper Detection

    Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Fixing/Registration Assembly 2-110 ● Pickup Retry Control ■ Fixing/Registration Assembly If the Pre-Registration Sensor (PS03) is not turned ON within the specified period of time ● Registration Control after the start of pickup operation, the Cassette 1_Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Motor (M05) It is a control to align paper and image on the ITB at a specified timing.

  • Page 154: Delivery Assembly

    Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Delivery Assembly 2-111 ● Stop Registration Control ■ Delivery Assembly It is a control to stop paper at the registration position, align paper and image on the ITB at a ●...

  • Page 155: Reverse/Duplex Assembly

    Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Reverse/Duplex Assembly 2-112 ■ Reverse/Duplex Assembly ● Duplex Reverse Control Paper is reversed outside the machine using the Reverse Mouth. ● Reverse Flapper Operation Paper stops at the duplex reverse stop position after a specified time has elapsed since The Reverse Flapper operates in accordance with the Reverse Motor (M08).
  • Page 156 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Reverse/Duplex Assembly 2-113 ● Duplex standby control ● Duplex Pre-standby control If it is possible to secure necessary paper interval by estimating the paper interval with the When the succeeding paper has not finished the registration control (non-stop registration preceding paper when the Duplex Sensor (PS01) is ON, the paper is re-picked up to the pre- control and stop registration control), the paper stops before the nip of the Duplex Feed registration.
  • Page 157 Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Controls > Jam Detection 2-114 The Duplex Solenoid (SL02) is turned ON 100 msec before the leading edge of the fed paper ■ Jam Detection reaches the duplex standby position. After the Duplex Solenoid (SL02) is turned ON, the drive ●...

  • Page 158: Work Of Service

    Technical Explanation > Pickup / Feed System > Work of Service > Periodical Servicing 2-115 Work of Service ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 0CC1 Sequence Software sequence error (Automatic adjustment: Transfer-related) ■ Periodically Replaced Parts 0CC2 Sequence Software sequence error (Automatic adjustment: Image formation-related)

  • Page 159: Software Counter

    Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Software counter 2-116 External Auxiliary System Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Country Target Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Code Controls 120V UL model Total 1 Total Copy...
  • Page 160 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Software counter 2-117 <Explanation of the list> Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item Country Target Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter • Large: Large size paper (when paper length exceeds 324 mm in paper feed direction) Code •...
  • Page 161 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan 2-118 ■ Fan Copy/print Service Stand Post Deep Initial Reader Sleep1 name rotation rotation rotation Sleep ● Location of Fans Drum Unit Suction Cooling Fan Delivery Cooling Fan Duplex FM05 Cooling Fan Power Supply...

  • Page 162: Power Supply

    Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply 2-119 ■ Power supply ● Internal power supply Main Power Supply Switch J7021 Main Controller PCB +3.3VC 3.3VU +24V Reader Motor /SEESAW +12V 24VC 12VC +3.3V ADF Motor Control Panel CPU PCB 12VP Only Standard Cassette Heater Model Low-voltage Power Supply Unit...

  • Page 163: Energy Saving Function

    Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Energy Saving Function 2-120 ● Power supply connection with the options ■ Energy Saving Function Reader/ADF ● Overview The power supply mode of this equipment is divided into the “Standby” mode and the “Sleep” mode.
  • Page 164 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Energy Saving Function 2-121 Standby The following descriptions are conditions for not entering DEEP SLEEP. This is the mode that the machine is running or the machine is ready to start operation. All the power is supplied.
  • Page 165 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Energy Saving Function 2-122 System Performance Status System Performance Status The Alarm Service is set to within 12 minutes. • A network application is communicating. • * When one of the following is being executed, the Alarm Service (Time) is set. •...

  • Page 166: Quick Startup

    Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup 2-123 ■ Quick Startup As for startup right after shutting down of the machine under any of the following conditions, it starts up normally (even quick startup is ON). To realize faster startup, power configuration has been changed to always supply power to •...
  • Page 167 Technical Explanation > External Auxiliary System > Service Tasks > Periodical Servicing 2-124 Service Tasks ● Effects of Spanning Tree-supported Hub If you set the network as a loop, data keeps staying in this loop and efficiency of data transfer ■...

  • Page 168: Active Directory Authentication

    * 64-bit version is not supported. 2) Users accessing the authentication server (Active Directory: Windows Server) • The user should belong to the "Canon Peripheral Admins" group on the Active Directory. • The user name should contain only single-byte alphanumeric characters, - (hyphen), _ (low line), and % (percent).

  • Page 169: Ldap Authentication

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users 2-126 ● LDAP authentication ■ PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users When using LDAP authentication by SSO-H, the following conditions need to be satisfied. The following environment is required to use this machine (managed by SSO-H) from a PC 1) LDAP server on the network.
  • Page 170 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS 2-127 Preparation for Using SMS Note: common to browsers To use SMS, a PC and browser used to access SMS are required, and the network settings •...

  • Page 171: Settings On The Device Side

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-128 ● PC and Browser Settings Note: The PC and browser used to access SMS need to satisfy the following conditions. In iR-ADV series, the System Manager ID and the System PIN are configured by default, so "Network"...
  • Page 172 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-129 ● Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL CAUTION: Communication • The setting [Use HTTP] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have restarted the To use SMS via SSL connection, it is required to specify a key pair and server certificate as device.
  • Page 173 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-130 2) Click [Management Settings] > [Device Management] > [Certificate Settings] > [Key and 5) Enter the necessary information, and then click the [OK]. Certificate Settings]. F-2-160 3) Click [Generate Key].
  • Page 174 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-131 6) Check to see that the generated key appears in [Registered Key and Certificate]. 3) Select the generated key, and then click the [Default Key Settings]. F-2-167 F-2-164 4) Check that [SSL] is displayed in the [Key Usage] entry field.
  • Page 175 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-132 Installing a server certificate (reference information) 3) Click the [Install Certificate] on the [General] tab. When you access a device where the key installed as standard [default key] is set as the key for SSL, "Certificate Error"...
  • Page 176 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-133 5) In [Certificate Store], select the [Place all certificates in the following store] option, and then 7) You will return to the [Certificate Store] dialog. Check that "Trusted Root Certification click the [Browse].
  • Page 177 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-134 9) If the [Security Warning] appears, click the [Yes]. (It does not appear when installing the ● Network Port Settings same certificate again.) The default port of the HTTP server used for MEAP and MEAP applications to provide the servlet function is 8000, and the HTTPS server's default port is 8443.
  • Page 178 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > How to Check the Serial Number 2-135 4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field ■ How to Check the Serial Number is displayed), and press [OK].
  • Page 179 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Login to SMS > When SMS Cannot Be Accessed 2-136 Login to SMS ■ When SMS Cannot Be Accessed ● If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization) ■ Outline After changing the default SMS login password, if you forgot the new password and cannot SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via log in to SMS, you can use a switch license for password initialization to change the password the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication).
  • Page 180 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Login to SMS > How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at the Time of Access 2-137 ● If login is not possible due to exclusive control ■ How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at Since access to SMS is under exclusive control, you cannot log in if another user has already the Time of Access logged into the SMS of the same device.
  • Page 181 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications 2-138 Installing an MEAP Application ■ Procedure to install applications 1) Long on to SMS. ■ Outline 2) Click [Install MEAP Application] on the menu. From the MEAP application installation screen, you can install the MEAP application as well as the license file.
  • Page 182 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications 2-139 5) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click [OK]. CAUTION: • You cannot install only the license. • You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license. Be sure to select its license file.

  • Page 183: Resource Information

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Resource Information 2-140 ■ Resource Information Note: As for an application that has just been installed, the status is "Installed". In order to use ● Outline the application, it is necessary to click the [Start] to change the status to [Started]. Application Management page shows [resource information] for information of the whole device resources including Amount Used, Remaining, and Percent Used.
  • Page 184 MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution. Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable 2-141 Technical Explanation >...
  • Page 185 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? 2-142 in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of iR-ADV 6075 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.20.xx or later...
  • Page 186 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? 2-143 MEAP Specifications List Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks iR-ADV C2230 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15,17, Description series 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 1 MEAP basic function 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51,...

  • Page 187: Meap Application Management

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application 2-144 MEAP Application Management Description 47 Addition of API which executes a print order from the MEAP application of the IMI encryption ■ Outline PDF document 48 ID expressing the scan function for iR-ADV C2030/C2025/C2020 series You can use the MEAP application management screen to perform basic management tasks...
  • Page 188 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application 2-145 4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either [Started] or ● Procedure to uninstall the MEAP application [Stopped].

  • Page 189: Managing The License File

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-146 1) Log in to SMS to click [MEAP Application Management] on the menu. ■ Managing the License File 2) Check that the status of the application you want to uninstall is [Stop] and the license has ●...
  • Page 190 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-147 ● Procedure adding a license file 4) Click [Browse], and select the license file you want to install. 1) Log on to SMS. 2) On MEAP Application Management, click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file.
  • Page 191 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-148 ● Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license) 3) On Application/ License Information page, click [License Management]. CAUTION: • Since the license file cannot be disabled when the application is still running, the application needs to be stopped before disabling the license file.
  • Page 192 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-149 ● Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file 5) License Management page appears. To download, click [Download]. Note: The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same device (with the same device serial number).

  • Page 193: Other License File Management Functions

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions 2-150 8) When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown, click [Yes]. 1) Log in to SMS, stop the application to be forwarded. (see "Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application".) F-2-218 CAUTION:...
  • Page 194 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions 2-151 4) Click [Disable] on the [Disable License File]. 7) The dialogue [File Download] is displayed. Click [Save]. F-2-225 8) Specify the download destination, click [Save]. F-2-226 9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click [Delete] to display the confirmation screen and click [Yes] to delete the file (in consideration of breakage of license for...

  • Page 195: About Login Service

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-152 Enhanced System Application Management ■ Default Authentication overview This login service is selected when the department ID management is enabled or no ■ Outline authentication function is set. Set the department ID management to [ON] on [Settings [Enhanced System Application Management] mainly manages the login services for logging / Registration] of this device and register 7-digit ID and PIN by department.
  • Page 196 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-153 ● Environment confirmation CAUTION: Refer to the section of "Preparation for Using SSO-H" of this manual for system requirements • When the setting is SSO-H, the card reader for the option controller card cannot be needed in each login service.
  • Page 197 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-154 ● Setting the Authentication Method ● Conducting Department ID Management When SSO-H Is Used In the case of SSO-H, it is possible to use a combination of multiple authentication methods. Department ID Management can be conducted also when SSO-H is used for login service.
  • Page 198 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-155 3) Disable Depart ID Management. 6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H. In [Settings/Registration], select [Management Settings] > [User Management] > Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in [Department ID Management] >...
  • Page 199 8) Check that the device can be logged in. (users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment function.

  • Page 200: Local Device Authentication

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication) 2-157 ■ Local device authentication ■ Server authentication (Active Directory authentication) It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H, and is used for an device on a ●...
  • Page 201 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication) 2-158 CAUTION: Note: • The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device subnet. Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing •...
  • Page 202 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication) 2-159 Settings for access mode in sites 1) SSO-Tokyo acquires site lists from Active Directories. Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as Note, however, that the Active Directories accessed in order to acquire site lists are in the detailed mode settings, are done via DMS or iWEMC.

  • Page 203: Server Authentication (Ldap Authentication)

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication and local device authentication 2-160 ■ Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication) ■ Server authentication and local device authentication It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed It is a user authentication method provided with both the "server authentication"...
  • Page 204 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services 2-161 ■ Steps to Change Login Services 3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, restart the device. 1) Click [Enhanced System Application Management] on [System Management]. F-2-246 2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service.

  • Page 205: Login Service Installation Procedure

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure 2-162 ■ Login Service Installation Procedure 3) Click [Install]. Follow the procedure show below to install login services. 1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] > [Enhanced System Application Management].

  • Page 206: Password Authentication

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication 2-163 System Application Management ■ Login Service Uninstallation Procedure Follow the procedure show below to uninstall login services. This function manages the login services for logging in to SMS. In order to uninstall a login service, the service needs to be stopped ("Installed"...

  • Page 207: Rls Authentication

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication 2-164 ■ RLS Authentication Note: If you want to change the display language, select the language from the drop-down list Login without using the SMS login window but by entering the user ID and password for of [Language] at the upper right of the login screen, and click the update button.

  • Page 208: Setting The Method To Login To Sms

    For local device authentication, users with Administrator or Device Admin authority. • In the case of server authentication, the users who belong to the group (default: Canon The method to log into SMS can be specified by one of the following methods.
  • Page 209 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline 2-166 ● Setting for login by Password Authentication 4) Click [Start] or [Stop] shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) to check if the status is changed. The procedures for changing the password authentication Start/ stop settings are as follows.
  • Page 210 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline 2-167 ● Setting for login by RLS Authentication 4) Click on [Start] or [Stop] shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) to check if the status is changed. The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start/ Stop settings are as follows.

  • Page 211: Meap Application System Information

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information 2-168 MEAP Application System Information ■ Initial Display Languages of SMS SMS supports English and Japanese. Display language can be changed with selecting by the ■ Outline drop down list on a login page.
  • Page 212 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application 2-169 ■ Display of System Information Details ■ Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application The system information details can be displayed to check more than one pieces of information MEAP system information can be printed out with device for confirmation.

  • Page 213: Meap Application Information

    Application Version: 1.0.0 The following information can be checked on the MEAP application information screen. Status: Resolved Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003 Application Information Vendor : Canon Inc. License Status : Installed • Application Name • Description • Version •...

  • Page 214: Procedure To Check The License File

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File 2-171 Check License 3) The MEAP application information screen appears. Scroll the screen and check the information of the target application. ■ Outline You can check the contents of the license file. ■...

  • Page 215: Procedure To Change The Sms Login Password

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline 2-172 Changing SMS Login Password MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management ■ Outline ■ Outline You can change the password for logging into SMS. If you forgot the login password and you want to change the password back to the default The MEAP Application Setting Information Management page and the MEAP Application Log value (MeapSmsLogin), see "If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)"...

  • Page 216: Advantages Obtained When Using The Services

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management 2-173 ■ Advantages Obtained When Using the Services ■ MEAP Application Setting Information Management By using MEAP Application Setting Information Management and MEAP Application Log The setting data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP Service, as long as the MEAP application supports these services, you can collectively Application Setting Information Management can be deleted.
  • Page 217 Technical Explanation > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management 2-174 ■ MEAP Application Log Management 4) To download the logs The file save dialog for the log file will appear. Specify the destination and save the file. The log data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP Application Log Service can be downloaded or deleted.
  • Page 218 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST 2-175 Maintenance ● Backup Item Automatically Copied The following data are backed up using SST: ■ Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the The following data are backed up (saved as Meapbackup.bin) using SST.

  • Page 219: Procedure For Backing Up The Meap Application Area Using Sst

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 2-176 ● Data backed up using SST in the case of iR-ADV devices ■ Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST In the case of iR-ADV devices, menus are implemented as MEAP application.
  • Page 220 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 2-177 4) Connecting the device using SST 6) Saving backup data When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [Start]. Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [OK] to save the backup data on the PC.
  • Page 221 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data 2-178 ■ Procedures to Restore Backup Data CAUTION: 1) Connecting to the device Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in [Settings/Registration] during the period Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up from backup using SST to recovery of the data.

  • Page 222: Formatting And Replacing The Hdd

    MEAP application installed. In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial number of the device in question.
  • Page 223 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Formatting and Replacing the HDD 2-180 ● HDD replacement procedure ● If the MEAP application area can be backed up Outline If the MEAP application area can be backed up, it can be recovered after replacing the HDD, The procedure for replacing the HDD differs according to whether the HDD functions normally so it is not necessary to prepare the special licenses for reinstallation.
  • Page 224 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 2-181 ■ MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 3) Press button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] is shown. Click [MEAPSAFE]. ● Outline Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up.
  • Page 225 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 2-182 ● How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode CAUTION: 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2. If the device has been started in MEAP SAFE mode, all the MEAP applications stop 2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] >...

  • Page 226: Work Procedure

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-183 4) Press the 0 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to "0"; then, press [OK]. ■ Collection of MEAP Console Logs ● Overview When debugging a MEAP application, console logs need to be collected in some cases.
  • Page 227 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-184 3) Press [RMT-CNSL]. PC setting procedure (when Tera Term is used) 1) Install the terminal software on the PC. 2) Start the terminal software, make the following settings, and then click the [OK]. F-2-307 4) Press either 1 (activate remote console function) on control panel (the numerical value F-2-310...
  • Page 228 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-185 4) The terminal setting screen will appear. Make the following settings, and then click the [OK]. 6) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Set the save destination path and the file name, and then click the [Save].
  • Page 229 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-186 9) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly. Note: While collecting logs, the following operations are available from the [File] menu. Comment to Log...
  • Page 230 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-187 PC setting procedure (when Hyper Terminal is used) 4) Click the "Properties" icon on the Hyper Terminal screen. 1) Start Hyper Terminal, set the connection name in the [Connect Description] dialog that appears on the screen, and then click the [OK].

  • Page 231: Usb Driver

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices 2-188 8) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect. ■ Using USB Devices ● USB Driver Two types of USB drivers While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively for MEAP application (hereinafter referred to as "MEAP driver"), not only MEAP driver but also USB system driver (hereinafter referred to as "system driver") can be used in iR-ADV series.
  • Page 232 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices 2-189 Availability for MEAP application of the USB device A (either HID keyboard or Mass Storage) Operating mode Software keyboard Conventional USB System driver plugged to device settings [Use MEAP application keyboard enabled MEAP supported MEAP...
  • Page 233 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices 2-190 Specifications for the use of USB keyboards ● Initialization of MEAP driver priority registration Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard.
  • Page 234 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices 2-191 ● USB Device report print 4) When pressing [OK], [ACTIVE] blinks on the status field. To check the vendor IDs (idVendor) and the product IDs (idProduct) registered in this device by means of declaration in Manifest file of MEAP applications, output the USB Device repot report print.
  • Page 235 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices 2-192 Example of output result I : Interface The interface information of a USB device is shown. Interface class and the driver to handle ******************************** can be recognized. *** USB Device report print *** ******************************** The value and the content of Driver are as follows.

  • Page 236: Integrated Authentication Function

    Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Integrated Authentication Function 2-193 The content of MEAP preferred device information ■ Integrated Authentication Function Display the information of the application or a USB device, which preferentially registered with ● Sharing the Authentication Information MEAP application.
  • Page 237 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Integrated Authentication Function 2-194 ● Comparison of Functions Select the item you want to disable, and click the [Update]. Volatile Credential Persistent Credential Registered Character strings and arbitrary Character strings only User ID/Password/ information Java objects Domain/Arbitrary character strings...
  • Page 238 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting 2-195 ■ Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task every 24 hours" A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-delay Main Power] Setting execution".
  • Page 239 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in 2-196 ■ Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Note : Even if the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H Unable to Be Logged in do not coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID Management, login is possible when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
  • Page 240 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in 2-197 • Only the information of Department ID Management was updated, resulting in mismatch. Procedure Only the Department ID Management information was changed in "Import All Function", 1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).
  • Page 241 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in 2-198 4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication. SSO-H user registration information edition screen: Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management] (SSO management screen [Main Menu] >...

  • Page 242: Reference Material

    (Esplet Type show user interfaces either on Local UI or Web. Esplet is a coined word Application) created by Canon, consisting of [Espresso] or Italian coffee and [let] derived from Applet/Service. File Description An identifier for the OS to identify the destination file requested by a program.
  • Page 243 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Reference material 2-200 Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations J2RE A set of basic programs to run applications developed in the programming Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one (Java 2 Runtime language of Java2.
  • Page 244 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Option for exclusive individual measure 2-201 ■ Option for exclusive individual measure Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations The web-base service to provide user interfaces for application life cycle ● Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2) (Service Management management.
  • Page 245 Technical Explanation > MEAP > Maintenance > Option for exclusive individual measure 2-202 4) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK]. F-2-358 5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device. 2-202 Technical Explanation >...

  • Page 246: Features And Benefits

    Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions 2-203 Embedded RDS ■ Features and benefits E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing Product Overview of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware equipment.
  • Page 247 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function 2-204 Limitations Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry When the following service call error is detected. COPIER Display ANALOG ■ Service Mode Menu Transmission Function HV-STS Error codes for transmission: E000 - E00F, // Fixing 1) In the following cases, service mode menu data is not transmitted.
  • Page 248 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Service cautions 2-205 Service cautions NOTE: *The user can conduct a communication test and seen the communication test result. 1) After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB, initialization of the E-RDS setting (ERDS- If the communication results in failure, an error code (a hexadecimal number, 8 digits) DAT) and a communication test (COM-TEST) need to be performed.
  • Page 249 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance 2-206 E-RDS Setup 3) Network settings Based on the results of the information obtained in 2) Advance preparations, make this ■ Confirmation and preparation in advance machine network related settings.
  • Page 250 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings 2-207 ■ Steps to E-RDS settings (b) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [CA-KEY] and touch the [OK] button. 1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2) Select [COPIER] >...
  • Page 251 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings 2-208 4) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. CAUTION: 5) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [E-RDS]. The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
  • Page 252 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings 2-209 If the communication is successful, "OK!" is displayed. If "NG!" (failed) appears, refer to the ■ Steps to Service Browser settings "Troubleshooting" and repeat until "OK!" is displayed. 1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

  • Page 253: Initialization Procedure

    Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Initializing E-RDS settings 2-210 3) Turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine. ■ Initializing E-RDS settings It is possible to clear the FLASH data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the 4) Make sure that "1 (: ACTIVE)"...
  • Page 254 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > FAQ 2-211 No.5 Q: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed. No.1 Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft ISA? Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail? A: E-RDS must comply with "Basic"...
  • Page 255 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > FAQ 2-212 No.10 Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu No.13 transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of Q: What is the number of the network port used by E-RDS? transmission? A: The port number used by E-RDS for communication with UGW is "443".

  • Page 256: Troubleshooting

    Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting 2-213 Troubleshooting Does the screen display "Response from the host."? (See the next figure.) YES: Proceed to Step 3). No.1 NO: There is a possibility that this machine’s network settings are wrong. Check the Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG! details of the IPv4 settings once more.
  • Page 257 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting 2-214 (b) Touch the [Up] button. Remedy 2: Troubleshooting using communication error log (COM-LOG) 1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [COM-LOG] and touch the blank field on the right side.
  • Page 258 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting 2-215 3) When each line is selected, the communication error log detailed screen is displayed as No.3 shown in the figure below. (Example: No. 02) Symptom: Registration information of the E-RDS machine was deleted from the device information on Web Portal, and then registered again.

  • Page 259: Error Code And Strings

    Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-216 Error code and strings No.7 Symptom: The display indicates that the service browser is enabled (BRWS-STS: 1), but the The following error information is displayed on the communication error log details screen. service browser fails to be activated.
  • Page 260 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-217 Code Character strings Cause Remedy Code Character strings Cause Remedy 8700 0306 SRAM AeRDS Improper value is written in Turn the device OFF/ ON. 19 8xxx 2002 URL server A URL different to that Check that the value of URL of version unmatch!
  • Page 261 Technical Explanation > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-218 Code Character strings Cause Remedy Code Character strings Cause Remedy 27 8xxx 2028 Server certificate • No route certificate installed • Install the latest device 35 xxxx xxxx Device internal An internal error, such as Turn the device OFF/ ON.

  • Page 262: Functional Overview

    Firmware Upload Updater Firmware • MEAP Application/System Option Installation Canon Inc. By linking devices to CDS and License Management System (providing the function to imageRUNNER 5) Writing process is manage licenses; hereinafter LMS), applications can be installed in devices via Updater,...
  • Page 263 PCs. User 1) Manually execute 2) License 5) Manuals, etc. Updater. Authentication MEAP Application Firmware Upload Updater Firmware Canon Inc. Manual 3) Create LF Upload 1) Enter LAN imageRUNNER ADVANCE Application Service 2) Firmware distribution Technician Canon Inc.

  • Page 264: System Configuration

    Registering/deleting firmware eRDS Firmware distribution schedule Confirming and downloading firmware Service Command for Firmware Distribution Firmware Technician Updating downloaded Canon Inc. firmware Cancelling downloaded F-2-383 firmware Acquiring firmware distribution information registered from UGW Notifying firmware version information Inquiring license for MEAP...

  • Page 265: Distribution Flow

    Technical Explanation > Updater > Functional Overview > Distribution Flow 2-222 ■ Distribution Flow ● MEAP Application/System Option Installation Flow MEAP application/system option installation method using service mode is not provided. ● Firmware Installation Flow Be sure to use the [Settings/Registration] to install. Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 3 methods.

  • Page 266: Limitations And Cautions

    Technical Explanation > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions 2-223 Limitations and Cautions Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed. ■ Limitations This is the Updater-specific specification. Job/Function Receiving Printing...
  • Page 267 Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Setting Sales Company’s HQ 2-224 Preparation ■ Setting Sales Company’s HQ When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s ■ Overview of Preparation HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is The following should be prepared before using Updater.

  • Page 268: Network Settings

    Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings 2-225 ■ Network Settings ● Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server. ● Connecting to External Network The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection 1.

  • Page 269: Communication Test

    Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings 2-226 4. Press [Settings] button. ● Communication Test This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server. NOTE: Carry out the communication test with both Embedded RDS and CDS. 1.
  • Page 270 Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings 2-227 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 5. Press [Yes] button. F-2-391 F-2-393 4. Press [Test Communication] button. Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to execute the communication test to the distribution server). Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).

  • Page 271: Enabling [Update Firmware] Button

    Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Update Firmware] Button 2-228 ■ Enabling UGW Link ■ Enabling [Update Firmware] Button When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW- To allow users to install firmware using Updater, the setting of firmware installation should be linked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
  • Page 272 Technical Explanation > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Manual Update] Button of Remote UI 2-229 ■ Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button ■ Enabling [Manual Update] Button of Remote UI To allow users to install applications using Updater, the setting of application installation To allow users to install firmware from Updater using the file on Local PCs, the setting of should be set to ON for users in advance.

  • Page 273: Various Setting

    Technical Explanation > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting 2-230 System Management Operations 5. Press [Delivery Server URL] to show the virtual keypad. Enter the URL. ■ Various Setting ● Setting URL of Distribution Server This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server. 1.
  • Page 274 Technical Explanation > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting 2-231 ● Setting Log Level 5. Select a log level from [Log Level] dropdown list. This section describes how to set system log levels. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2.

  • Page 275: Displaying Logs

    Technical Explanation > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs 2-232 ■ Displaying Logs 5. Press [Display Update Logs] button. ● Update Logs This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2.

  • Page 276: System Logs

    Technical Explanation > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs 2-233 ● System Logs 5. Press [Display System Logs] button. This section describes how to confirm System Logs. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button. 3.
  • Page 277 Technical Explanation > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs 2-234 ● Communication Test 5. Press [Yes] button. This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2.

  • Page 278: Upgrading Updater

    Technical Explanation > Updater > Maintenance > How to Replace Devices 2-235 Maintenance ■ Upgrading Updater The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. See the section of “Version Upgrade” , Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” for more detailed information. ■...
  • Page 279 Technical Explanation > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware 2-236 No.4 Q: In the course of “UGW-linked download”, what will happen if the user downloads the ■ FAQ on Installing Firmware firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with “UGW-linked download”...
  • Page 280 Technical Explanation > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option 2-237 No.9 ■ FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download? No.1 A: Yes. [Cancel] button is shown. Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free space? A: An error message is shown.

  • Page 281: Faq On General Matters Of Updater

    Technical Explanation > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater 2-238 ■ FAQ on General Matters of Updater No.2 Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side? No.1 A: Be sure to perform the following from the service mode. Q: What preparation is needed in each installation method? •...

  • Page 282: Limitations On Dcm General

    Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Limitations on DCM General 2-239 ● Method of Import/Export The following shows the methods to import/export DCM files. • Import/Export by remote UI • Import/Export by service mode • Import/Export using iW Management Console DCM Plug-in ■...
  • Page 283 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Export All by Remote UI 2-240 • Following limitations are applied to password for DCM file. ■ Export All by Remote UI • Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters Changing the value of a related service mode item can include items of "Service Mode •...
  • Page 284 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/Export by Service Mode (External) 2-241 ■ Import/Export by Service Mode (External) 2. Log in to service mode and press [BACKUP]. Import/export by service mode allows the selection between USB flash drive and internal HDD for the save destination of DCM files.
  • Page 285 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/Export by Service Mode (External) 2-242 5. The names of DCM files saved in USB flash drive are displayed. Press [->]. 7. After entering the password, select [BACKUP]. Press [OK] to execute export. F-2-427 8.

  • Page 286: Import Procedure

    Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/Export by Service Mode (External) 2-243 Reference: Procedure 1. Connect the USB flash drive. iAC350_QNU00008_V0123_0001_2013_1224_133005.dcm 2. Log in to service mode and press [RESTORE]. Export Model YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS Main controller DCM File format firm ware version DCM Job management number F-2-430...
  • Page 287 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/Export by Service Mode (External) 2-244 4. When referring to USB flash drive, enter "1" and press [OK]. 6. Select [SELECT]. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press [OK]. "*"...
  • Page 288 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/Export by Service Mode (External) 2-245 8. Select [PASSWD], enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press [OK]. 9. After entering the password, select [RESTORE]. Press [OK] to execute import. Click here F-2-437 F-2-439 "OK!"...
  • Page 289 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/Export by Service Mode (Internal) 2-246 ■ Import/Export by Service Mode (Internal) 2. Select [LIST] after the screen moves to <BACKUP>. Import/export by service mode allows the selection between USB flash drive and internal HDD for the save destination of DCM files.
  • Page 290 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/Export by Service Mode (Internal) 2-247 4. The names of DCM files saved in internal HDD are displayed. Press [->]. 6. After entering the password, select [BACKUP]. Press [OK] to execute export. F-2-447 7.
  • Page 291 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/Export by Service Mode (Internal) 2-248 ● Import Procedure 3. When referring to internal HDD, enter "2" and press [OK]. Preparation There is no need to newly prepare for saving to internal HDD. Overall flow Here is a procedure for Importing from internal HDD.
  • Page 292 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > Import/Export by Service Mode (Internal) 2-249 5. Select [SELECT]. 7. Select [PASSWD], enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press [OK]. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press [OK]. "...

  • Page 293: List Of Items Which Can Be Imported

    Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-250 8. After entering the password, select [RESTORE]. Press [OK] to execute import. ■ List of items which can be imported The following shows the items to be imported for this model. Note that the setting values are not imported in cases such as below: •...
  • Page 294 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-251 Setting Information Case Case Case Setting Information Case Case Case Preferences Display mm/Inch Entry Switch Preferences Network Dedicated Port Settings Settings ID/User Name Display On/Off Use Spool Function Display Remaining Toner Error Message Startup Settings...
  • Page 295 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-252 Setting Information Case Case Case Setting Information Case Case Case Function Common OOXML Settings Function Send TX Start Speed Settings Settings Specify Minimum PDF Version Confirm Entered Fax Number Format PDF to PDF/A Allow Fax Driver TX...
  • Page 296 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-253 ● Address Book Setting Information Case Case Case Setting Information Case Case Case Management License/ Message Board/Support Link Settings Other Remote Operation Settings Set Destination Use ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Register Destinations Data Management...
  • Page 297 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-254 ● Paper Type Management Settings Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER ADJUST MTF2-M7 Setting Information Case Case Case MTF2-M8 MTF2-M9 Preferences MTF2-S1...
  • Page 298 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-255 Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER ADJUST GAIN-CL0 COPIER ADJUST DENS...
  • Page 299 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-256 Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-C COPIER ADJUST...
  • Page 300 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-257 Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2RE COPIER OPTION...
  • Page 301 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-258 Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER OPTION BODY REPORT-Z COPIER OPTION...
  • Page 302 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-259 Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-SP3 COPIER OPTION...
  • Page 303 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-260 Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER3 COPIER OPTION...
  • Page 304 Technical Explanation > DCM > DCM > List of items which can be imported 2-261 Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER OPTION SRL-SPSW PDL-THR CR-TYPE INT-FACE NWCT-TM FEEDER ADJUST DOCST LA-SPEED DOCST2 LA-SPD2 DOCSTDUP SORTER ADJUST ST-ALG1...

  • Page 305: Periodical Service

    Periodical Service ■ List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and locations for cleaning Periodical Service...

  • Page 306: Periodically Replacement Parts

    Periodical Service > List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and locations for cleaning > Periodically Replacement Parts List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and locations for cleaning Periodically Replacement Parts There are no periodically replacement parts in this machine. Periodical Service >...
  • Page 307 Periodical Service > List of periodically replacement parts, consumable parts and locations for cleaning > Consumable parts Consumable parts F-3-1 ●: Replaced (consumables) Work interval Parts counter Every Every Every Service mode: COPIER> COUNTER> Type Item Parts number Q'ty Estimated life 30,000 50,000 150,000...
  • Page 308 Disassembly/Assembly ■ Preface ■ List of Parts ■ List of Connectors ■ External Cover/Interior System ■ Original Exposure/Feed System ■ Controller System ■ Laser Exposure System ■ Image Formation System ■ Fixing System ■ Pickup/Feed System ■ Cleaning Procedure ■ Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board Disassembly/Assembly...
  • Page 309 Disassembly/Assembly > Preface > Points to Note when Tightening a Screw Preface Points to Note when Tightening a Screw For reduction in weight, thin plates are used in some parts of this machine. Outline In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark near it as shown in the figure below, strongly tightening the screw may damage or deform the screw hole.

  • Page 310: External / Internal Cover

    Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > External / Internal Cover > Reader Unit List of Parts ■ Reader Unit External / Internal Cover ■ ADF UNIT F-4-3 Parts Name Reference Original Tray ADF Base Feeder Cover ADF Rear Cover ADF Side Guide Plate T-4-2 F-4-4 Parts Name...
  • Page 311 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > External / Internal Cover > Printer (Front Side) ■ Printer (Front Side) Parts Name Reference Front Cover (Refer to page 4-34) Cassette [15] [14] [16] Face Cover Left Lower Cover (Refer to page 4-37) [13] Face Cover Left Upper Cover...
  • Page 312 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > External / Internal Cover > Printer (Rear Side) ■ Printer (Rear Side) Parts Name Reference Rear Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-35) [12] Rear Cover 2 [11] Environment Heater Cover [10] [13] Right Lower Cover Multi-purpose Tray Lower Cover Right Front Cover (Refer to page 4-38)

  • Page 313: Internal View

    Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > ADF UNIT List of Main Unit ■ Internal View ■ ADF UNIT F-4-7 Parts Name Reference Front Inner Right Cover Front Inner Lower Cover Front Inner Upper Cover T-4-6 F-4-8 Parts Name Reference...
  • Page 314 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Printer (Front Side) (1/2) ■ Reader Unit ■ Printer (Front Side) (1/2) F-4-9 Parts Name Reference Reader Unit (Refer to page 4-69) T-4-8 [10] [11] F-4-10 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Printer (Front Side) (1/2)
  • Page 315 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Printer (Front Side) (2/2) ■ Printer (Front Side) (2/2) Parts Name Reference Toner Bottle Mount Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-134) Toner Bottle Mount Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-134) Toner Bottle Mount Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-134) Toner Bottle Mount Unit (Bk)

  • Page 316: Electrical Components

    Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > ADF Unit Electrical Components ■ Printer (Rear Side) ■ ADF Unit ● Motor F-4-13 Parts Name Main Unit Reference ADF Motor ADF Pickup Unit [10] T-4-12 F-4-12 Parts Name Reference Fixing Drive Unit (Refer to page 4-140) Bottle Drive Unit (CK) (Refer to page 4-133)

  • Page 317: Reader Unit

    Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Reader Unit 4-10 ● Sensor ■ Reader Unit ● Motor PS03 PS02 F-4-14 Parts Name Main Unit Reference F-4-16 PS02 Document End Sensor ADF Pickup Unit Parts Name Main Unit Reference PS03 Document Sensor ADF Pickup Unit...
  • Page 318 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Printer 4-11 ■ Printer Parts Name Main Unit Reference ● Motor CL Drum Motor Main Drive Unit Bk Drum _ ITB Motor Main Drive Unit Developing Motor Main Drive Unit Fixing Motor Fixing Drive Unit Cassette 1 _ Multi-purpose Tray Cassette 1 Pickup Drive Unit...
  • Page 319 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Printer 4-12 ● Fan ● Clutch FM05 FM04 UN81 FM03 CL04 CL03 CL02 CL01 FM01 F-4-20 Parts Name Main Unit Reference F-4-19 CL01 Developing Cylinder Clutch (Y) Main Drive Unit Parts Name Main Unit Reference CL02...
  • Page 320 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Printer 4-13 ● Solenoid Parts Name Main Unit Reference SL01 Primary Transfer Main Drive Unit Disengagement Solenoid SL02 Duplex Solenoid Right Cover Unit SL03 Registration Shutter Solenoid Registration Patch Sensor Unit T-4-20 ●...
  • Page 321 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Printer 4-14 ● Sensor (1/2) Parts Name Main Unit Reference PS01 Duplex Sensor Right Cover Unit PS06 Bottle Rotation Sensor (Y) Toner Bottle Mount Unit (Y) PS07 Bottle Rotation Sensor (M) Toner Bottle Mount Unit (M) PS08 Bottle Rotation Sensor (C) Toner Bottle Mount Unit (C)
  • Page 322 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Printer 4-15 ● Sensor (2/2) Parts Name Main Unit Reference PS02 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor Regist/Paper Pickup Unit PS03 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor Right Cover Unit PS04 Pre-registration Sensor Regist/Paper Pickup Unit PS05 Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor Regist/Paper Pickup Unit PS10 Multi-purpose Tray HP Sensor...
  • Page 323 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Printer 4-16 ● Switch Parts Name Main Unit Reference SW01 Main Power Supply Switch Product Configuration SW02 Interlock Switch 1 Product Configuration SW03 Interlock Switch 2 Product Configuration SW04 Environment Switch Product Configuration SW05 Right Cover Open/Close...
  • Page 324 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Printer 4-17 ● PCB (1/2) Parts Name Main Unit Reference UN05 Y/M/C/Bk Laser Driver PCB Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-107) UN08 Drum Unit Relay PCB (Y) Product Configuration UN09 Drum Unit Relay PCB (M) Product Configuration UN10...
  • Page 325 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Parts > Electrical Components > Printer 4-18 ● PCB (2/2) Parts Name Main Unit Reference UN01 Low-voltage Power Supply PCB Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-97) UN02 Secondary Transfer High-voltage Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-93) UN03 Primary Transfer High-voltage PCB Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-95)
  • Page 326 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-19 List of Connectors J904 J905 J907 J910 J8101 J8103 J8102 J911 J913 J901 F-4-28 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks J8101 UN81 Main Controller PCB J911 CIS Unit J8102 UN81 Main Controller PCB J904...
  • Page 327 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-20 J6401 J6301 J6402 J6302 J6403 J6404 J5304 J5303 J5302 J155 J5301 J156 J151 F-4-29 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks J151 UN04 DC Controller PCB J5301 PS06 Bottle Rotation Sensor (Y) J5302 PS07 Bottle Rotation Sensor (M)
  • Page 328 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-21 J6014 J6005 J6013 J6004 J6012 J6003 J6011 J6002 J6001 J160 J6024 J162 J6023 J6021 J6022 F-4-30 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks J160 UN04 DC Controller PCB J6001 UN08 Drum Unit Relay PCB (Y) J6002 UN09...
  • Page 329 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-22 J5708 J5701 J5702 J5703 J5704 J140 J5219 J142 J146 J5218 J5217 F-4-31 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks J140 UN04 DC Controller PCB J5701 M01 CL Drum Motor J5705 J5702 M02 Bk Drum _ ITB Motor J5708...
  • Page 330 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-23 J5611 J5610 J5608 J5615 J5511 J5513 J5551 J5607 J5550 J122 J5552 J5609 J121 J5201 J123 J171 F-4-32 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks J121 UN04 DC Controller PCB J5509 J5511 Cassette 1 _ Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Motor J5513...
  • Page 331 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-24 J5604 J5612 J5504 J5603 J5506 J272 J5503 J274 J5505 J276 J120 J5421 J170 J271 J180 J272 J5214 J191 F-4-33 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks J120 UN04 DC Controller PCB J5501 J5503 PS18...
  • Page 332 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-25 J5215 J5411 J5406 J5415 J5412 J5414 J5407 J5402 J323 J5413 J302 J5405 J303 J135 J5211 J130 J151 J134 F-4-34 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks J130 UN04 DC Controller PCB J5411 SW05 Right Cover Open/Close Detection Switch...
  • Page 333 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-26 J5403 J5404 J5420 J7021 J5205 J5204 J202 J134 J7002 J201 J110 J251 J183 J184 J241 J6104 F-4-35 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks J134 UN04 DC Controller PCB J5401 J5404 PS12 Delivery Sensor...
  • Page 334 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-27 J1001 J1002 J321 J7003 J313 J1008 J7010 J315 J314 J7011 J322 J3001 J301 J112 J304 J7001 F-4-36 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks J1008 UN83 Control Panel CPU PCB J3001 UN100 Control Panel Numeric Keypad PCB...
  • Page 335 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-28 J7019 J7013 F-4-37 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks J7013 UN81 Main Controller PCB UN85,86 Fax Communication Board UN91,92 Off-hook PCB J7019 UN81 Main Controller PCB UN86 Fax Communication Board UN86 Fax Communication Board UN92...
  • Page 336 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-29 J7017 J7008 J7009 J7018 J7005 J7004 F-4-38 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks UN81 Main Controller PCB UN82 TPM PCB J7008 UN81 Main Controller PCB UN94 J7018 UN81 Main Controller PCB UN94 J7009 UN81...
  • Page 337 Disassembly/Assembly > List of Connectors 4-30 J1025 J192 J199 J190 J198 F-4-39 J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks J192 UN04 DC Controller PCB J6202 J6202 Staple Finisher-S1 Option J190 UN04 DC Controller PCB J5904 Cassette Feeding Unit-AG1, Option Cassette Feeding Unit-AH1 J198...
  • Page 338 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Layout Drawing > Reader Unit 4-31 External Cover/Interior System ■ Reader Unit Layout Drawing ■ ADF UNIT F-4-40 Parts Name Reference Original Tray ADF Base Feeder Cover ADF Rear Cover ADF Side Guide Plate T-4-39 F-4-41 Parts Name...
  • Page 339 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Layout Drawing > Printer (Front Side) 4-32 ■ Printer (Front Side) Parts Name Reference Front Cover (Refer to page 4-34) Cassette [15] [14] [16] Face Cover Left Lower Cover (Refer to page 4-37) [13] Device Port Cover Left Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-37)
  • Page 340 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Layout Drawing > Printer (Rear Side) 4-33 ■ Printer (Rear Side) Parts Name Reference Rear Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-35) [12] Rear Cover 2 [11] Environment Heater Cover [10] [13] Right Lower Cover Multi-purpose Tray Lower Cover Right Front Cover (Refer to page 4-38)

  • Page 341: Removing The Front Cover

    Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Front Cover > Procedure 4-34 Removing the Front Cover ■ Internal View F-4-45 ■ Procedure 1) Open the Front Cover [1]. 2) Remove the Front Cover Retainer Band [2]. • 1 Boss [3] F-4-44 Parts Name Reference...

  • Page 342: Removing The Rear Cover

    Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Rear Cover 1 > Procedure 4-35 Removing the Rear Cover 1 3) Pull out the cassette [1]. 4) Remove the Front Cover [2] while it is halfway open. • 1 Claw [3] •...
  • Page 343 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Rear Cover 1 > Procedure 4-36 1) Remove the Reader Rear Cover 2 [1]. 3) When the Cassette Pedestal is installed, remove the fixture [1]. • 2 Claws [2] • 1 Knurled Screw [2] •...
  • Page 344 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Left Lower Cover > Procedure 4-37 Removing the Left Upper Cover Removing the Left Lower Cover F-4-54 F-4-56 ■ Preparation ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). ■...
  • Page 345 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Right Front Cover > Pre-check items 4-38 Removing the Right Front Cover 2) Remove the Left Lower Cover [1]. • 3 Screws [2] • 2 Hooks [3] F-4-59 ■ Pre-check items F-4-58 NOTE: The 4 claws [1] of the Right Front Cover are shown in the figure below.
  • Page 346 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Right Rear Cover/Right Rear Lower Cover > Procedure 4-39 Removing the Right Rear Cover/Right Rear Lower ■ Procedure Cover 1) Pull out the cassette [1], and open the Front Cover [2]. 2) Pull the Right Cover Open/Close Lever [3], and open the Right Cover Unit [4]. F-4-63 ■...

  • Page 347: Pre-Check Items

    Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Right Upper Cover > Pre-check items 4-40 Removing the Right Upper Cover 2) Release the lock of the Right Cover Stopper Front [1] and the Right Cover Stopper Rear [2], and then further open the Right Cover Unit [3]. F-4-67 ■...
  • Page 348 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Right Upper Cover > Procedure 4-41 ■ Procedure 2) Remove the Right Upper Cover [1]. • 9 Claws [2] 1) Open the ADF Unit + Reader Unit [1]. • 2 Bosses [3] F-4-69 F-4-70 4-41...
  • Page 349 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Right Cover Unit > Procedure 4-42 Removing the Right Cover Unit CAUTION: • Be careful not to drop the Right Cover Unit [1] when disassembling/assembling. F-4-71 ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). 2) Remove the Right Rear Cover/Right Rear Lower Cover(Refer to page 4-39).
  • Page 350 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Right Cover Unit > Procedure 4-43 1) Disconnect the Connector [1]. 2) Remove the Right Cover Stopper Rear Holder [1]. • 1 Screw [2] F-4-75 F-4-77 CAUTION: NOTE: How to assemble the Right Cover Stopper Rear Holder Be sure to disassemble/assemble by holding the Right Cover Unit [1] after step 2.
  • Page 351 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Right Cover Unit > Procedure 4-44 3)Remove the Right Cover Stopper Front Holder [1]. 4) Remove the Right Cover Rear Support Holder [1]. • 1 Screw [2] • 1 Screw [2] • 1 Boss [3] •...
  • Page 352 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray > Procedure 4-45 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray 1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Lower Cover [1], and release the Multi-purpose Tray Shaft Holder [2]. F-4-83 ■ Procedure CAUTION: Be careful not to drop the Multi-purpose Tray Shaft Holder [2] in the host machine when F-4-85 disassembling/assembling.
  • Page 353 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Delivery Tray > Procedure 4-46 Removing the Delivery Tray 2) Remove the Delivery Tray [2] while pressing the damper [1]. • 2 Screws [3] • 1 Hook [4] • 4 Bosses [5] F-4-87 ■...
  • Page 354 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Rear Upper Cover > Procedure 4-47 Removing the Rear Upper Cover 2) Remove the ADF Arm [2] while pressing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit [1]. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop the ADF Unit + Reader Unit [1] when disassembling/assembling. F-4-90 ■...

  • Page 355: Removing The Upper Cover

    Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Upper Cover > Procedure 4-48 Removing the Upper Cover 3) Remove the Rear Upper Cover [1]. • 2 Bosses [2] F-4-96 ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). 2) Remove the Right Rear Cover/Right Rear Lower Cover(Refer to page 4-39).
  • Page 356 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Upper Cover > Procedure 4-49 2) Remove the Upper Cover [2] while pressing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit [1]. 3) Place the ADF Unit + Reader Unit [1] on the ADF Arm [2] temporarily. •...
  • Page 357 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Control Panel Unit > Procedure 4-50 Removing the Control Panel Unit 2) Remove the Control Panel Rear Hinge Cover [1]. • 2 Bosses [2] • 1 Claw [3] F-4-101 ■ Procedure 1) Open the ADF Unit + Reader Unit [1]. F-4-103 3) Turn the Control Panel Unit [1] upward.
  • Page 358 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Control Panel Unit > Procedure 4-51 4) Remove the Control Panel Unit [1]. 5) Free the 2 harnesses [1] on the Control Panel. • 3 Screws [2] • 2 Reuse Bands [2] •...
  • Page 359 Disassembly/Assembly > External Cover/Interior System > Removing the Control Panel Unit > Procedure 4-52 7) Remove the Control Panel Lower Hinge Cover [1]. NOTE: How to assemble the Control Panel Unit • 2 Bosses [2] Insert the protrusion [A] of the Control Panel Upper Hinge Cover [1] into the lower side •...
  • Page 360 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Layout Drawing 4-53 Original Exposure/Feed System Parts Name Main Unit Remarks Reference ADF Unit Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-54) ADF Pickup Feed Unit ADF Unit (Refer to page 4-64) Layout Drawing Separation Pad ADF Unit (Refer to page 4-63) ADF Pickup Unit...
  • Page 361 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > Procedure 4-54 Removing the ADF Unit CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the White Sheet [1] and the White Plate [2] of the ADF Unit when disassembling/assembling. F-4-113 ■ Procedure CAUTION: Be careful not to drop the ADF [1] when disassembling/assembling.
  • Page 362 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > Procedure 4-55 2) Remove the Original Tray [1]. 3) Remove the ADF Rear Cover [1]. • 1 Claw [2] • 1 Boss [2] • 5 Hooks [3] F-4-118 4) Disconnect the terminal [1] of the Grounding Wire. •...
  • Page 363 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > Procedure 4-56 6) Close the Feeder Cover [1]. 7) Remove the ADF Unit [2] while freeing the harness [1]. • Harness Guide [A] F-4-120 F-4-121 4-56 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > Procedure...
  • Page 364 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > ADF Unit 4-57 ■ ADF Unit Adjustment of the Degree of a Right Angle 1) Set a test chart on ADF, and give one sheet of copy. ● Prepare before Adjustment 2) Confirm the degree of a right angle of the image on the leading edge of the test chart and Prepare a test chart.
  • Page 365 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > ADF Unit 4-58 DADF reading position adjustment Adjustment of the leading edge margin of image at ADF reading (single-sided) After executing the reading position adjustment with the following service mdoe 1, check the 1) Set a test chart on ADF, and give one sheet of single-sided copy.
  • Page 366 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > ADF Unit 4-59 Adjustment of the leading edge margin of image at ADF reading (duplex/front side) Adjustment of the leading edge margin of image at ADF reading (duplex/back side) 1) Set a test chart on ADF, and give one sheet of copy.
  • Page 367 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > ADF Unit 4-60 Adjust the image position (horizontal scanning direction/front side) at ADF 5) Write the new changed value in the service label. 6) Exit the service mode. reading. 1) Place a test chart on the ADF, and make one single-sided copy.
  • Page 368 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit > ADF Unit 4-61 Fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio at ADF reading (front side) Fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio at ADF reading (back side) 1) Set the image of the test chart upward in ADF, and give one sheet of copy. 1) Set the image of the test chart downward in ADF, and give one sheet of copy.
  • Page 369 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Pickup Unit > Procedure 4-62 Removing the ADF Pickup Unit Adjustment the White Level for ADF Scanning 1) Take the action stated below in the service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2 (White level adj in book/DADF mode) 1.
  • Page 370 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Separation Pad > Procedure 4-63 Removing the ADF Separation Pad 1) Open the Feeder Cover [1]. F-4-136 ■ Procedure F-4-134 CAUTION: 2) Remove the ADF Pickup Unit [1]. • 1 Claw [2] Be sure not to touch the surface [A] of the pad when disassembling/assembling.
  • Page 371 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit > Procedure 4-64 Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit 1) Open the Feeder Cover [1]. F-4-140 ■ Procedure CAUTION: F-4-138 Be careful not to damage the white sheet [1] of the ADF Unit when disassembling/ 2) Remove the ADF Separation Pad [1].
  • Page 372 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit > Procedure 4-65 1) Open the ADF Unit [1] to remove the White Plate [2]. 3) Open the Feeder Cover [1]. • 4 Hooks [3] F-4-142 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and then close the ADF Unit [2]. F-4-144 4) Remove the Original Tray [1].
  • Page 373 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit > Procedure 4-66 5) Remove the ADF Rear Cover [1]. 8) Remove the 4 screws [1]. • 1 Boss [2] 9) Close the Feeder Cover [2], and then remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit [3]. •...
  • Page 374 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Feed Drive Unit > Procedure 4-67 Removing the ADF Feed Drive Unit CAUTION: Be sure to perform work carefully so as not to shift the phase of the inner gear [2] on the ADF Feed Drive Unit [1] when disassembling/assembling.
  • Page 375 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Feed Drive Unit > Procedure 4-68 2) Remove the ADF Feed Drive Unit [1]. NOTE: How to install the ADF Feed Drive Unit • Harness Guide [A] The arm edge [B] must not be laid on top of the [A] part of the coupling [1]. •...
  • Page 376 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure 4-69 Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit 1) Remove the Main Controller Sub Cover [1]. • 1 Screw [2] • 2 Hooks [3] F-4-155 ■...
  • Page 377 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure 4-70 6) Open the ADF Unit + Reader Unit [1]. 7) Remove the ADF Arm Cover [2]. • 1 Screw [3] F-4-159 3) Disconnect the terminal [1] of the Grounding Wire. •...
  • Page 378 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit > Procedure 4-71 Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit 8) Remove the ADF Arm [1], and then remove the ADF Unit + Reader Unit [2]. • 2 Shafts [3] F-4-163 ■...
  • Page 379 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit > Copyboard Glass Unit 4-72 1) Open the ADF [1]. ■ Copyboard Glass Unit 2) Remove the Copyboard Glass Unit [2]. ● Procedure of Replacement • 6 Face Rubbers [3] 1) Enter the value (White level data entry of white plate) indicated on the platen glass as •...
  • Page 380 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit > Copyboard Glass Unit 4-73 7) After executing the reading position adjustment with the following service mdoe 1, check 9) Adjust the image position (horizontal scanning direction/front side) at ADF reading. the auto setting value with the following service mode 2 and write the value in the service 1.
  • Page 381 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit > Copyboard Glass Unit 4-74 10) Adjust the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at copyboard reading. 11) Adjust the image position (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading. 1. Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass, and make one single-sided copy. 1.
  • Page 382 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the CIS Unit > Preparation 4-75 Removing the CIS Unit 12) Make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading. 1. Set the image of the test chart upward in Copyboard Glass, and give one sheet of single-sided copy.
  • Page 383 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the CIS Unit > Procedure 4-76 ■ Procedure 1) Move the CIS Unit [1] to the center. CAUTION: Do not touch the sensor [A] part of the CIS Unit when disassembling/assembling. F-4-176 2) Remove the 2 spacers [1] and the Flat Cable [2]. F-4-175 F-4-177 4-76...
  • Page 384 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the CIS Unit > Procedure 4-77 3) Remove the CIS Unit [1]. Caution: • 2 Shafts [2] • When the CIS Spacers are mixed up or lost, check the CIS Rank Label [3] to use, and use the appropriate CIS Spacer that fits the rank of the CIS Unit.
  • Page 385 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the CIS Unit > After Replacing the Scanner Unit (Reader side CIS) 4-78 ■ After Replacing the Scanner Unit (Reader side CIS) 5) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 6) After executing the shading position adjustment with the following service mdoe 1, check ●...
  • Page 386 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the CIS Unit > After Replacing the Scanner Unit (Reader side CIS) 4-79 9) Adjust the image position (horizontal scanning direction/front side) at ADF reading. 10) Adjust the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at copyboard reading. 1.
  • Page 387 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the CIS Unit > After Replacing the Scanner Unit (Reader side CIS) 4-80 11) Adjust the image position (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading. 12) Make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio (vertical scanning direction) at 1.
  • Page 388 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Reader Motor > Procedure 4-81 Removing the Reader Motor 2) Remove the Reader Motor Cover [1]. • 2 Screws [2] F-4-190 ■ Procedure 1) Open the ADF Unit + Reader Unit [1]. F-4-192 3) Remove the Reader Motor [1].
  • Page 389 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Reader Motor > Procedure 4-82 4-82 Disassembly/Assembly > Original Exposure/Feed System > Removing the Reader Motor > Procedure...
  • Page 390 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Layout Drawing 4-83 Controller System Parts Name Main Unit Remarks Reference [1] Touch Panel / LCD Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-101) [2] Primary Transfer High-voltage Product Configuration UN03 (Refer to page 4-95) Layout Drawing PCB Unit [3] Speaker Product Configuration...

  • Page 391: Before Replacing

    Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Main Controller Unit > Procedure 4-84 Removing the Main Controller Unit ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). ■ Procedure 1) Remove the Main Controller Sub Cover [1]. • 1 Screw [2] •...
  • Page 392 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Main Controller Unit > Procedure 4-85 2) Remove the Main Controller Cover [1]. 3) Remove the Power Supply Cooling Fan Unit [1]. • 2 Connectors [2] • 1 Connector [2] • 1 Screw [3] •...
  • Page 393 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Main Controller Unit > Procedure 4-86 4) Remove the harness connected to the Main Controller Unit [1]. • 6 Connectors [2] • 1 USB Connector [3] • 1 Control Panel Communication Connector [4] •...
  • Page 394 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Main Controller Unit > Procedure 4-87 7) Free the harness [1] from the Harness Guide [A]. 9) Remove the Rear Cover 2 [1]. 8) Remove the Fan Duct [2]. • 3 Hooks [2] •...
  • Page 395 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Main Controller Unit > Procedure 4-88 10) Remove the Main Controller Unit [1]. NOTE: • 5 Screws [2] The completed assembly of the Main Controller Unit [1] is shown below. • 3 Hooks [3] F-4-207 F-4-206 4-88...
  • Page 396 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Main Controller Unit > Aftter Replacing 4-89 11) Replace parts from an old PCB to a new PCB. ■ Aftter Replacing • [1] TPM PCB Aftter Replacing 1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch. •...

  • Page 397: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb

    Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the DC Controller PCB > Procedure 4-90 Removing the DC Controller PCB ■ Procedure 1) Disconnect the connector connected to the DC Controller PCB [1]. • 27 Connectors [2] • 1 Flat Cable [3] F-4-209 ■...
  • Page 398 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the DC Controller PCB Unit > Preparation 4-91 Removing the DC Controller PCB Unit NOTE: The completed assembly of the DC Controller PCB is shown below. F-4-213 ■ Before Replacing Before 1)Backup the Service Mode data. Replacing (Lv.2) COPIER >...
  • Page 399 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the DC Controller PCB Unit > Procedure 4-92 ■ Procedure 3) Remove the Flat Cable [1] and the 2 harnesses [2] from the Harness Guide [A]. 1) Disconnect the connector connected to the DC Controller PCB [1]. •...
  • Page 400 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Secondary Transfer High-voltage PCB/Developing High-voltage PCB Unit > Procedure 4-93 Removing the Secondary Transfer High-voltage PCB/ NOTE: Developing High-voltage PCB Unit The completed assembly of the DC Controller PCB Unit is shown below. F-4-218 ■...
  • Page 401 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Secondary Transfer High-voltage PCB/Developing High-voltage PCB Unit > Procedure 4-94 2) Free the harness [1] from the Harness Guides [A] and [B]. 3) Remove the Harness Guide [1]. • 1 Reuse Band [2] •...
  • Page 402 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Primary Transfer High-voltage PCB Unit > Procedure 4-95 Removing the Primary Transfer High-voltage PCB Unit 5) Remove the Environment Sensor [1] from the Secondary Transfer High-voltage PCB/ Developing High-voltage PCB Unit. F-4-224 ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35).
  • Page 403 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Primary Transfer High-voltage PCB Unit > Procedure 4-96 4) Remove the Primary Transfer High-voltage PCB Unit [1]. • 1 Screw [2] • 1 Claw [3] • 4 Hooks [4] F-4-225 2) Remove the round shape terminal [1]. F-4-227 •...
  • Page 404 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Low-voltage Power Supply PCB Unit > Procedure 4-97 Removing the Low-voltage Power Supply PCB Unit CAUTION: • When disassembling/assembling, be sure to handle carefully so as to not scatter toner since the Collection Mouth [1] of the Waste Toner Container is located behind the Primary Transfer High-voltage PCB Unit [2].
  • Page 405 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Low-voltage Power Supply PCB Unit > Procedure 4-98 2) Free the harness [2] from the Harness Guide [A] of the Fan Guide [1]. 4) Remove the Power Switch Harness Guide [1]. 3) Remove the Fan Guide [1]. •...
  • Page 406 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Low-voltage Power Supply PCB Unit > Procedure 4-99 5) Remove the Fixing Harness Guide [1]. NOTE: How to install the Power Switch Harness Guide • 1 Boss [2] Be sure to align the groove [A] of the Power Switch Harness Guide with the edge [B] of •...
  • Page 407 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Low-voltage Power Supply PCB Unit > Procedure 4-100 7) Remove the Low-voltage Power Supply PCB Unit [1]. • 4 Screws [2] • 1 Hook [3] F-4-236 NOTE: How to install the Power Supply Harness Guide Be sure to align the 2 grooves [A] of the Power Supply Harness Guide with the edge [B] of the side plate, and hook the hook [1] on the hole [2] in the side plate of the Low- F-4-238...
  • Page 408 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Touch Panel/Control Panel CPU PCB Unit /LCD Unit > Procedure 4-101 Removing the Touch Panel/Control Panel CPU PCB 1) Remove the Control Panel Rear Cover [1]. • 4 Screws [2] Unit /LCD Unit F-4-239 ■...
  • Page 409 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Touch Panel/Control Panel CPU PCB Unit /LCD Unit > After Replacing 4-102 3) Turn over the 2 Grounding Sheets [1], and remove the LCD Unit [2]. NOTE: How to install the Touch Panel Be sure to set the Touch Panel [1] inside of the 8 positioning guides [2] on the Control Panel.
  • Page 410 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the HDD > Procedure 4-103 Removing the HDD ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). ■ Procedure 1) Remove the Main Controller Sub Cover [1]. • 1 Screw [2] • 2 Hooks [3] F-4-246 Before Replacing Before...
  • Page 411 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the HDD > Points to Note when Using the HDD 4-104 2) Remove the Main Controller Cover [1]. 3) Remove the HDD [1]. • 2 Connectors [2] • 2 Connectors [2] • 1 Screw [3] •...
  • Page 412 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Fax Unit > Procedure 4-105 Removing the Fax Speaker Unit Removing the Fax Unit F-4-251 F-4-253 ■ Preparation ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). 2) Remove the Left Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-37) 2) Remove the Left Upper Cover(Refer to page 4-37).
  • Page 413 Disassembly/Assembly > Controller System > Removing the Fax Unit > Procedure 4-106 2) Remove the Main Controller Cover [1]. 3) Remove the Fax Unit [1]. • 2 Connectors [2] • 2 Connectors [2] • 1 Screw [3] • 1 Edge Saddle [3] •...

  • Page 414: Removing The Laser Scanner Unit

    Disassembly/Assembly > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure 4-107 Laser Exposure System Removing the Laser Scanner Unit Layout Drawing F-4-259 ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). 2) Remove the Left Lower Cover(Refer to page 4-37). 3) Remove the Primary Transfer High-voltage PCB Unit(Refer to page 4-95).
  • Page 415 Disassembly/Assembly > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure 4-108 1) Remove the Shutter Link Unit [1]. 3) Pull out the Laser Scanner [1]. • 1 Boss [2] • 1 Edge Saddle [2] • 3 Hooks [3] CAUTION: Do not touch the PCB installed on the Laser Scanner Unit when disassembling/ assembling.
  • Page 416 Disassembly/Assembly > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Aftter Replacing 4-109 4) Free the Flat Cable [1] from the Wire Saddle [2], and disconnect the 2 connectors [3]. NOTE: How to install the Laser Scanner Unit 1) Insert the 3 protrusions [B] of the Laser Scanner Unit [1] into the 3 holes [A] of the plate.
  • Page 417 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Layout Drawing 4-110 Image Formation System Parts Name Main Unit Remarks Reference Toner Bottle Mount Unit (Y) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-134) Toner Bottle Mount Unit (M) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-134) Layout Drawing Toner Bottle Mount Unit (C) Product Configuration...
  • Page 418 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Layout Drawing 4-111 Parts Name Main Unit Remarks Reference [15] Secondary transfer outer Roller Right Cover Unit (Refer to page 4-123) Guide Unit [16] Secondary transfer outer Roller Secondary Transfer Outer (Refer to page 4-122) Unit Roller Guide Unit [17] Registration Patch Sensor Unit Product Configuration...
  • Page 419 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container > Procedure 4-112 Removing the Waste Toner Container 1) Open the Front Cover [1], and remove the Waste Toner Container [2]. F-4-270 ■ Procedure CAUTION: F-4-272 If the Waste Toner Container is tilted, toner [2] may spill out of the collection mouth [1] onto the floor.
  • Page 420 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit (Y/M/C/Bk) > Procedure 4-113 Removing the Toner Container (Y/M/C/Bk) Removing the Drum Unit (Y/M/C/Bk) F-4-273 F-4-275 ■ Procedure ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Waste Toner Container(Refer to page 4-112). NOTE: In this procedure, the procedure for the (Bk) color Toner Container Unit is described.
  • Page 421 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit (Y/M/C/Bk) > Procedure 4-114 1) Remove the Drum Cartridge [1]. CAUTION: Touching the drum part [A] of the Drum Unit may cause finger oil to be attached on the drum.This makes the finger oil on the drum to be attached to toner, causing the risk of soiled image.

  • Page 422: Removing The Itb Unit

    Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure 4-115 Removing the ITB Unit CAUTION: When the Drum Unit [1] is installed to the host machine, if the Drum Unit is not installed properly, the Waste Toner Container [2] will protrude. As a result, when closing the Front Cover [3], the Front Cover [3] interferes with the Waste Toner Container and cannot be closed in some cases.
  • Page 423 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure 4-116 CAUTION: CAUTION: • Do not damage the ITB [1] when disassembling/assembling. • Do not open the outlet [A] of the Transfer Cleaning Shutter when disassembling/ assembling. Otherwise, toner may scatter. F-4-283 F-4-285 •...
  • Page 424 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure 4-117 1) Pull the Right Cover Open/Close Lever [1], and open the Right Cover Unit [2]. 3) Hold the 2 Push Levers [1], and pull out the ITB Unit [3] to the position where the 2 handles [2] are lifted.
  • Page 425 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Cleaning when installing/removing the ITB Unit 4-118 1) Put the removed Drum Unit (Y) [1] on a sheet of paper [2]. ■ Cleaning when installing/removing the ITB Unit 2) Cover the removed Drum Unit (Y) [1] with a paper [3] to block the light for Drum (4). Be sure to check for any soiling before cleaning since toner may be spilled over Drum Unit (Y) when installing/removing the ITB Unit.
  • Page 426 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Installing the ITB Unit 4-119 ■ Cleaning the Registration Patch Sensor Unit ■ Installing the ITB Unit Be sure to clean the Registration Patch Sensor Unit when replacing the ITB Unit. ●...
  • Page 427 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure 4-120 Removing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit F-4-299 ■ Preparation 1) Remove the ITB Unit(Refer to page 4-115). 2) Remove the Waste Toner Container(Refer to page 4-112). F-4-297 3) Close the Right Cover [1].
  • Page 428 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure 4-121 1) Remove the Registration Patch Sensor Unit [1]. NOTE: How to install the Registration Patch Sensor Unit • 1 Claw [2] • 4 Shafts [3] 1) When assembling, be sure to hook the protrusion [A] of the Registration Patch •...
  • Page 429 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit > Procedure 4-122 Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit 1) Pull the Right Cover Open/Close Lever [1], and open the Right Cover Unit [2]. F-4-304 ■ Procedure F-4-306 NOTE: 2) Hold the 2 edges [A], and remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit [1].
  • Page 430 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Guide Unit > Procedure 4-123 Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Guide 1) Pull the Right Cover Open/Close Lever [1], and open the Right Cover Unit [2]. Unit F-4-308 ■...
  • Page 431 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Guide Unit > Procedure 4-124 3) Remove the Right Cover Stopper Rear Holder [1]. 4) Remove the Duplex Gear Holder [1]. • 1 Screw [2] • 3 Claws [2] CAUTION: Be sure to perform work carefully so as not to damage the gear [1] when disassembling/ assembling.
  • Page 432 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Guide Unit > Procedure 4-125 5) Remove the Lock Guide Rear [1]. 7) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Guide Unit [1]. • 1 Claw [2] • 1 Boss [3] •...
  • Page 433 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Registration Drive Unit > Procedure 4-126 Removing the Registration Drive Unit NOTE: How to assemble the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Guid Unit When assembling, insert the protrusion [A] of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Guid Unit into the groove [B] of the Right Cover Unit, and insert the protrusion [C] between the groove [D] of the Lock Guide and the spring [1] to install the unit.

  • Page 434: Removing The Main Drive Unit

    Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Preparation 4-127 Removing the Main Drive Unit CAUTION: • Do not install the Front Inner Lower Cover with the lens [1] of the Waste Toner Sensor PCB removed. •...
  • Page 435 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure 4-128 ■ Procedure NOTE: How to assemble the Main Drive Unit When assembling the Main Drive Unit, make sure to align one of 3 protrusions of the 1) Pull the Right Cover Open/Close Lever [1], and open the Right Cover Unit [2].
  • Page 436 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y/M/C/Bk) > Preparation (for the Hopper Unit (Y/M/C)) 4-129 Removing the Hopper Unit (Y/M/C/Bk) NOTE: How to assemble the Main Drive Unit Check that there is no gap and then secure using 6 screws in the order indicated by the illustration below.
  • Page 437 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y/M/C/Bk) > Preparation (for the Hopper Unit (Y/M/C)) 4-130 15) Free the harness [1] from the Harness Guide [A] of the High-voltage Contact Unit. 16) Remove the High-voltage Contact Unit [1]. •...
  • Page 438 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y/M/C/Bk) > Procedure 4-131 ■ Preparation (for the Hopper Unit (Bk)) CAUTION: 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). Perform work carefully so as not to scatter the toner when disassembling/assembling. 2) Remove the Left Upper Cover (to be removed for models equipped with a fax) (Refer to page 4-37).
  • Page 439 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Pressure Release Switch > Procedure 4-132 Removing the ITB Pressure Release Switch ■ Procedure 1) Remove the ITB Pressure Release Switch [1]. • 1 Connector [2] • Harness Guide [A] • 1 Claw [3] •...
  • Page 440 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Bottle Drive Unit (Y/M/C/Bk) > Procedure 4-133 Removing the Bottle Drive Unit (Y/M/C/Bk) 1) Free the Harness [1]. • Harness Guide [A] F-4-336 F-4-337 ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). 2) Remove the Left Upper Cover (to be removed for models equipped with a fax) (Refer to page 4-37).
  • Page 441 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Bottle Mount (Y/M/C/Bk) > Preparation (for the Toner Bottle Mount (Y/M/C)) 4-134 Removing the Toner Bottle Mount (Y/M/C/Bk) NOTE: How to install the Bottle Drive Unit (C Bk) Be sure to align the hole [A] of the gear with the protrusion [B] of the shaft to install the unit.
  • Page 442 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Bottle Mount (Y/M/C/Bk) > Preparation (for the Toner Bottle Mount (Y/M/C)) 4-135 17) Remove the Hopper Unit (Y/M/C/Bk) (remove the Bottle Drive Unit of the color to be removed)(Refer to page 4-129). 18) Remove the Bottle Drive Unit (Y/M/C/Bk) (remove the Bottle Drive Unit of the color to be removed)(Refer to page 4-133).
  • Page 443 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Bottle Mount (Y/M/C/Bk) > Preparation (for the Toner Bottle Mount (Bk)) 4-136 ■ Preparation (for the Toner Bottle Mount (Bk)) 21) Remove the Control Panel Rear Hinge Cover [1]. • 2 Bosses [2] 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35).
  • Page 444 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Bottle Mount (Y/M/C/Bk) > Preparation (for the Toner Bottle Mount (Bk)) 4-137 23) Remove the Delivery Guide [1]. 25) Remove the Delivery Cooling Fan Holder [1]. • 1 Screw [2] • 1 Connector [2] •...
  • Page 445 Disassembly/Assembly > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Bottle Mount (Y/M/C/Bk) > Procedure 4-138 ■ Procedure 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the Harness Guide [A] and the screw [2]. NOTE: In this procedure, the procedure for the Toner Bottle Mount (Bk) is described. Perform the same procedure for removing the Toner Bottle Mount (Y/M/C).a 1) Remove the tag [1].
  • Page 446 Disassembly/Assembly > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Assembly > Procedure 4-139 Fixing System Removing the Fixing Assembly Layout Drawing F-4-355 ■ Procedure CAUTION: • Be sure to start removing the Fixing Assembly after it is cooled down enough. The Fixing Assembly may cause burn injuries due to the high temperature immediately after printing.

  • Page 447: Removing The Fixing Drive Unit

    Disassembly/Assembly > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Drive Unit > Preparation 4-140 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 2) Hold the 2 Release Levers [1] of the Fixing Assembly, and remove the Fixing Assembly [2]. F-4-359 ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). 2) Remove the Left Upper Cover (to be removed for models equipped with a fax) (Refer to page 4-37).
  • Page 448 Disassembly/Assembly > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Drive Unit > Procedure 4-141 ■ Procedure 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [2], free the cable from the Reuse Band [3] and remove the 3 screws [4], all of which are of the Fixing Drive Unit [1]. F-4-360 2) Remove the Fixing Drive Unit [2] while disconnecting the inner connector [1].
  • Page 449 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Layout Drawing 4-142 Pickup/Feed System Parts Name Main Unit Remarks Reference Delivery/Reverse Unit Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-165) Layout Drawing Regist/Paper Pickup Unit Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-157) Cassette 1 pickup Roller Regist/Paper Pickup (Refer to page Unit 4-144)
  • Page 450 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Inner Cover Unit > Procedure 4-143 Removing the Right Inner Cover Unit 2) Release the lock of the Right Cover Stopper (Front) [1] and the Right Cover Stopper Rear [2], and then further open the Right Cover Unit [3]. F-4-363 ■...
  • Page 451 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller/Cassette Separation Roller/Cassette Feed Roller > Procedure 4-144 Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller/Cassette 3) Remove the Right Inner Cover Unit [1]. • 2 Shafts [2] Separation Roller/Cassette Feed Roller F-4-367 • Cassette Pickup Roller [1] •...
  • Page 452 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller/Cassette Separation Roller/Cassette Feed Roller > Procedure 4-145 2) Release the lock of the Right Cover Stopper (Front) [1] and the Right Cover Stopper Rear [2], CAUTION: and then further open the Right Cover Unit [3]. Be sure not to touch the surface [A] of the roller when disassembling/assembling.
  • Page 453 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller/Cassette Separation Roller/Cassette Feed Roller > Procedure 4-146 ● When removing the Cassette Pickup Roller NOTE: How to install the Cassette Pickup Roller 4) Move the Pickup Guide Holder [1]. • Be sure to align the groove [A] of the Cassette Pickup Roller [1] with the protrusion [B] of the gear to install the roller.
  • Page 454 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller/Cassette Separation Roller/Cassette Feed Roller > Procedure 4-147 7) Remove the Cassette Feed Roller [1]. ● When removing the Cassette Separation Roller • 1 Claw [2] 8) Remove the Cassette Separation Roller [1]. •...
  • Page 455 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller /Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller /Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller > Procedure 4-148 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller ■ Procedure /Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller NOTE: The layout for the Cassette Pickup Roller [1] /Separation Roller [2] /Feed Roller /Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller [3] is shown below.

  • Page 456: Disassembling Procedure

    Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller /Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller /Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller > Procedure 4-149 ● Disassembling Procedure 2) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Roller Holder 2 [1]. • 2 Shaft Holes [2] 1) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Roller Holder 1 [1]. •...

  • Page 457: Assembling Procedure

    Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller /Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller /Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller > Procedure 4-150 When removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller 6) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller [1]. 4) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller [2] while pressing the Torque Limiter [1]. •...
  • Page 458 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller /Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller /Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller > Procedure 4-151 2) Store the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller [2] while paying attention not to remove its 4) Align the groove [A] of the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller [2] with the protrusion [B] of the shaft [1].
  • Page 459 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Reassembling when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detached 4-152 Reassembling when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation 6) Install the Multi-purpose Tray Roller Holder 2 [1]. • 2 Shaft Holes [2] Roller Shaft is detached •...
  • Page 460 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Reassembling when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detached 4-153 ● Procedure 2) Assemble the Torque Limiter [2] on the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft [1]. 1) Hook the 2 shafts [2] on the 2 hooks [1]. CAUTION: CAUTION: Be sure to align the groove [B] of the Torque Limiter [2] with the protrusion [B] of the...
  • Page 461 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Reassembling when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detached > Reassembling when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detache 4-154 ■ Reassembling when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller ● Procedure 1) Remove the Right Cover Stopper Rear Holder [1]. Shaft is detached and dropped inside the host machine •...
  • Page 462 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Reassembling when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detached > Reassembling when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detache 4-155 5) Assemble the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft [2] on the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Holder [1].
  • Page 463 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Reassembling when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detached > Reassembling when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detache 4-156 6) Assemble the Torque Limiter [2] on the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft [1]. 7) Assemble the Separation Roller [2] on the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft [1].
  • Page 464 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration/Pickup Unit > Procedure 4-157 Removing the Registration/Pickup Unit CAUTION: • If the Registration Roller [1] and the Pre-registration Roller [2] are replaced separately, not simultaneously, it may generate a difference in feeding speed and cause feeding problems such as geometrical characteristics and jams.
  • Page 465 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration/Pickup Unit > Procedure 4-158 1) Remove the Right Cover Stopper Front [1] and the Right Cover Stopper Rear [2]. 2) Remove the Swing Guide [1]. • 2 Hooks [3] • 2 Shafts [2] •...
  • Page 466 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration/Pickup Unit > Procedure after replacement When images with uneven density (white spots) are generated after re 4-159 4) Remove the Registration/Pickup Unit [1]. ■ Procedure after replacement • 5 Screws [2] When images with uneven density (white spots) are generated •...
  • Page 467 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration/Pickup Unit > Procedure after replacement When images with uneven density (white spots) are generated after re 4-160 1) Test Print (output of halftone). CAUTION: Service mode: Select 5 for COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE. •...
  • Page 468 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration/Pickup Unit > Procedure after replacement When images with uneven density (white spots) are generated after re 4-161 Procedure when images with uneven density (white spots) are generated on the front side 2) Remove the Swing Guide [1]. •...
  • Page 469 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration/Pickup Unit > Procedure after replacement When images with uneven density (white spots) are generated after re 4-162 4) Loosen the 2 screws [2] of the Registration/Pickup Unit [1]. 6) Assemble the Registration/Pickup Unit, output a test print, and confirm that images with uneven density (white spots) are not generated.
  • Page 470 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration/Pickup Unit > Procedure after replacement When images with uneven density (white spots) are generated after re 4-163 Procedure when images with uneven density (white spots) are generated on the rear side 2) Remove the Swing Guide [1]. •...
  • Page 471 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration/Pickup Unit > Procedure after replacement When images with uneven density (white spots) are generated after re 4-164 4) Loosen the 2 screws [2] of the Registration/Pickup Unit [1]. 6) Assemble the Registration/Pickup Unit, output a test print, and confirm that images with uneven density (white spots) are not generated.
  • Page 472 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit > Procedure 4-165 Removing the Delivery/Reverse Unit NOTE: How to assemble the Delivery/Reverse Unit Be sure to lift up the Paper Full Detection Flag [1] to install the unit. F-4-439 ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Fixing Assembly(Refer to page 4-139).
  • Page 473 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit > Procedure 4-166 Removing the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit ■ Procedure 1) Remove the High-voltage Contact Guide 1 [1]. • 1 Claw [2] • 2 Hooks [3] •...
  • Page 474 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit > Procedure 4-167 2) Move the High-voltage Contact Guide 2 [1]. 3) Remove the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit [1]. • 1 Claw [2] • 2 Connectors [2] •...
  • Page 475 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit > Procedure 4-168 NOTE: How to assemble the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit NOTE: How to assemble the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit 1) Insert the hook [4] of the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit [1] inside the hole [A] of the 3) Install the High-voltage Contact Guide 1 [1].
  • Page 476 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Drive Unit > Procedure 4-169 Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Drive Unit 2) Move the Harness Guide [1]. • 1 Boss [2] • 1 Hook [3] F-4-449 ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Rear Cover 1(Refer to page 4-35). 2) Remove the Secondary Transfer High-voltage PCB/Developing High-voltage PCB Unit (Refer to page 4-93).
  • Page 477 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Drive Unit > Procedure 4-170 4) Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Drive Unit [1]. • 4 Screws [2] • 2 Connectors [3] F-4-453 4-170 Disassembly/Assembly > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Drive Unit > Procedure...
  • Page 478 Disassembly/Assembly > Cleaning Procedure > Layout Drawing 4-171 Cleaning Procedure Parts Name Reference Cleaning the Copyboard Glass/Reading Glass (Refer to page 4-172) Cleaning the Dustproof Glass (Refer to page 4-172) Layout Drawing Cleaning when installing/removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-173) Cleaning the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Refer to page 4-174) Cleaning the Registration Front Guide...

  • Page 479: Cleaning The Dustproof Glass

    Disassembly/Assembly > Cleaning Procedure > Cleaning the Dustproof Glass > Procedure 4-172 Cleaning the Copyboard Glass/Reading Glass Cleaning the Dustproof Glass ■ Procedure ■ Procedure 1) Clean the Copyboard Glass [1]/Reading Glass [2] with a glass cleaning sheet [3]. 1) Open the Front Cover [1]. 2) Remove the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool [2].
  • Page 480 Disassembly/Assembly > Cleaning Procedure > Cleaning when installing/removing the ITB Unit > Procedure 4-173 Cleaning when installing/removing the ITB Unit 1) Put the removed Drum Unit (Y) [1] on a sheet of paper [2]. 2) Cover the removed Drum Unit (Y) [1] with a paper [3] to block the light for Drum (4). Be sure to check for any soiling before cleaning since toner may be spilled over Drum Unit (Y) when installing/removing the ITB Unit.
  • Page 481 Disassembly/Assembly > Cleaning Procedure > Cleaning the Registration Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure 4-174 Cleaning the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Be sure to clean the Registration Patch Sensor Unit when replacing the ITB Unit. NOTE: How to install the ITB Unit Preparation 1) Hold the 2 handles [1], align the 2 protrusions [B] of the ITB Unit [2] with the 2 grooves [A] of the rails of the ITB Unit, and then put the unit inside the machine.
  • Page 482 Disassembly/Assembly > Cleaning Procedure > Cleaning the Registration Front Guide > Procedure 4-175 Cleaning the Registration Front Guide ■ Procedure 1) Pull the Right Cover Open/Close Lever [1], and open the Right Cover Unit [2]. F-4-463 2) Release the lock of the Right Cover Stopper (Front) [1] and the Right Cover Stopper Rear [2], and then further open the Right Cover Unit [3].
  • Page 483 Disassembly/Assembly > Cleaning Procedure > Cleaning the Registration Roller/Pre-registration Roller > Procedure 4-176 Cleaning the Registration Roller/Pre-registration Roller ■ Procedure 1) Pull the Right Cover Open/Close Lever [1], and open the Right Cover Unit [2]. F-4-466 2) Release the lock of the Right Cover Stopper (Front) [1] and the Right Cover Stopper Rear [2], and then further open the Right Cover Unit [3].
  • Page 484 Disassembly/Assembly > Cleaning Procedure > Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Guide > Procedure 4-177 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Guide 4) Clean the surface [A] using lint-free paper [1] soaked with alcohol while rotating the Pre- registration Roller [2]. ■ Procedure 1) Pull the Right Cover Open/Close Lever [1], and open the Right Cover Unit [2]. F-4-469 F-4-470 4-177...
  • Page 485 Disassembly/Assembly > Cleaning Procedure > Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Guide > Procedure 4-178 2) Release the lock of the Right Cover Stopper (Front) [1] and the Right Cover Stopper Rear [2], 3) Clean the [A] part of the Secondary Transfer Guide [2] using lint-free paper [1] soaked with and then further open the Right Cover Unit [3].
  • Page 486 Disassembly/Assembly > Cleaning Procedure > Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide > Procedure 4-179 Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide ■ Preparation 1) Remove the Fixing Assembly (Refer to page 4-139). ■ Procedure CAUTION: Be sure to start removing the Fixing Assembly after it is cooled down enough. The Fixing Assembly right after printing may cause burn injury.
  • Page 487 Disassembly/Assembly > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine 4-180 Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Part to be Description Procedure When TPM is replaced enabled (ON) Board...
  • Page 488 Disassembly/Assembly > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine 4-181 Part to be Description Procedure When TPM is Items User Service Favorite Settings Remote UI(Import/Export Remote UI(Import/ replaced enabled (ON)
  • Page 489 Disassembly/Assembly > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine 4-182 ● Using SST enables the following: Items User Service Audit Log Remote UI(Settings/ SST has the following functions that are necessary for service work: Registration >...
  • Page 490 Adjustment ■ Document Exposure System ■ Main Controller ■ Pickup Feed System Adjustment...
  • Page 491 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Service mode backup Document Exposure System Service mode backup The machine is adjusted one by one at the factory shipment and the adjustment values are written on the service label. When the adjustment is carried out at a field and the service mode values are changed, be sure to write the changed values on the service label.
  • Page 492 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > When clearing the Reader-related RAM data of the Main Controller PCB. When clearing the Reader-related RAM data of the When backup is not performed normally 5) Enter the values written on the service label (on the back of the Front Cover). Main Controller PCB.
  • Page 493 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Copyboard Glass Unit Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) 7) After executing the reading position adjustment with the following service mdoe 1, check the auto setting value with the following service mode 2 and write the value in the service ■...
  • Page 494 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Copyboard Glass Unit 9) Adjust the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at ADF reading. 10) Adjust the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at copyboard reading. 1. Place a test chart on the ADF, and make one single-sided copy. 1.
  • Page 495 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > Copyboard Glass Unit 11) Adjust the image position (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading. 12) Make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio (vertical scanning direction) at 1.
  • Page 496 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > After Replacing the Scanner Unit (Reader side CIS) ■ After Replacing the Scanner Unit (Reader side CIS) 5) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 6) After executing the shading position adjustment with the following service mdoe 1, check ●...
  • Page 497 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > After Replacing the Scanner Unit (Reader side CIS) 9) Adjust the image position (horizontal scanning direction/front side) at ADF reading. 10) Adjust the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at copyboard reading. 1.
  • Page 498 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > After Replacing the Scanner Unit (Reader side CIS) 11) Adjust the image position (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading. 12) Make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio (vertical scanning direction) at 1.
  • Page 499 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > ADF Unit 5-10 ■ ADF Unit Adjustment of the Degree of a Right Angle 1) Set a test chart on ADF, and give one sheet of copy. ●...
  • Page 500 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > ADF Unit 5-11 DADF reading position adjustment Adjustment of the leading edge margin of image at ADF reading (single-sided) After executing the reading position adjustment with the following service mdoe 1, check the 1) Set a test chart on ADF, and give one sheet of single-sided copy.
  • Page 501 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > ADF Unit 5-12 Adjustment of the leading edge margin of image at ADF reading (duplex/front side) Adjustment of the leading edge margin of image at ADF reading (duplex/back side) 1) Set a test chart on ADF, and give one sheet of copy.
  • Page 502 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > ADF Unit 5-13 Adjust the image position (horizontal scanning direction/front side) at ADF Fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio at ADF reading (front side) reading. 1) Set the image of the test chart upward in ADF, and give one sheet of copy. 2) Compare the image length of the feed direction of the test chart and the copy of the test 1) Place a test chart on the ADF, and make one single-sided copy.
  • Page 503 Adjustment > Document Exposure System > Original Exposure and Feed System (Reader) > ADF Unit 5-14 Fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio at ADF reading (back side) Adjustment the White Level for ADF Scanning 1) Set the image of the test chart downward in ADF, and give one sheet of copy. 1) Take the action stated below in the service mode (White level adj in book/DADF mode).
  • Page 504 Adjustment > Main Controller > HDD 5-15 Main Controller Backup Method Custmer Service Device Backup Data Information (Except DCM) Delivery Address List None RUI/ WebService Works required at HDD replacement WebService Forwarding Settings When replacing the HDD, be sure to perform the following works. Setting items Favorite Settings SST/USB...

  • Page 505: Dc Controller Pcb

    Adjustment > Main Controller > Control Panel CPU PCB/Touch Panel 5-16 Main controller PCB DC controller PCB Before 1) Backup of the Forwarding Settings and Service Mode setting values (MN-CON) Before 1)Backup the Service Mode data. Replacing Use the Remote UI. Replacing (Lv.2) COPIER >...
  • Page 506 Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Setting method when the size detection patterns are overlapped 5-17 Pickup Feed System Setting method when the size detection patterns are overlapped The method of distinguishing between A5-R and STMT-R is using the following method or setting in the user settings.
  • Page 507 Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Cassette Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side; Mechanical Adjsutment) 5-18 Cassette Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side; Adjustment In Case of Nonstandard procedure 2) Pull out the cassette. Mechanical Adjsutment) 3) Check the scale position on the adjusting plates. Adjustment 1) Make copies using the Cassette 1, and check that the left edge margin is 2.5 ±...
  • Page 508 Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Cassette Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side; Mechanical Adjsutment) 5-19 Adjustment 4) Loosen the fixing screw. Adjustment 5) Move the Adjustment Plates right and left according to the scale values checked procedure procedure in step 3. As the Adjustment Plate is moved toward the left of the machine by 1 scale, the left edge margin is increased by 0.5 mm.
  • Page 509 Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Cassette Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side; Software Adjsutment) 5-20 Cassette Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side; Adjustment 6) Tighten the fixing screw. procedure 7) Return the cassette to its original position. Software Adjsutment) NOTE: When the cassette positions are uneven due to the mechanical adjustment, Adjustment...
  • Page 510 Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side; Software Adjsutment) 5-21 Cassette Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side; Multi-purpose Tray Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st Software Adjsutment) side; Software Adjsutment) Adjustment 1) Make 2-sided copy from cassette 1, and check that the left margin on the 2nd side Adjustment 1) Make copies from the Multi Purpose Tray, and check that the left margin on the 1st procedure...
  • Page 511 Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side) 5-22 Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (1st side/normal paper) Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side) Adjustment 1) Make copies from cassettte 1, and check that the lead-edge margin is L1 = 4.0 Adjustment 1) Make copies from cassette 1, and check that the lead-edge margin is L1 = 4.0 procedure...

  • Page 512: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting ■ Initial Check ■ Test Print ■ Troubleshooting Items ■ Version Upgrade ■ Controller Self Diagnosis ■ Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs ■ Debug Log Troubleshooting...

  • Page 513: Initial Check Items List

    Troubleshooting > Initial Check > Initial check items list Initial Check Initial check items list Item Detail Check Site Environment The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%). The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place. The machine is not near a source of fi re or dust.

  • Page 514: Steps To Select The Test Print Type

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > Steps to select the test print TYPE Test Print Overview This machine have the following test print TYPE and you can judge the image failure that is checked as “Yes” in the following image check items with each test print. If the image failure occurred on normal output does not reappear on the test print, it may be caused by the PDL input or reader side.

  • Page 515: How To Use The Test Print

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > 16 gradations (TYPE=4) How to use the test print ■ 16 gradations (TYPE=4) F-6-1 This test print is for mainly checking the gradation, fogging, white line and uneven density at front & rear. Check item Check method Assumed cause...
  • Page 516 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > Full half tone (TYPE=5) ■ Full half tone (TYPE=5) F-6-2 This test print is for mainly checking the black line, white line and uneven density. MEMO: 1. Select: service mode > COPIER > TEST > PG and specify developing color “COLOR-Y/M/C/K” to output the print by developing color.
  • Page 517 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > Grid (TYPE=6) ■ Grid (TYPE=6) F-6-3 This test print is for mainly checking the color displacement, right angle accuracy and straight line accuracy. Check items Check method Assumed cause Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear on solid area of Failure of Laser Scanner Unit...
  • Page 518 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > MCYBk horizontal stripe (TYPE=10) ■ MCYBk horizontal stripe (TYPE=10) 2.5+1.5/-1.5mm 4.0+1.5/-1.0mm F-6-4 This test print is for mainly checking the dark area density of each color, each color balance and white line on development. Check items Check method Assumed cause...
  • Page 519 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > 64-gradations (TYPE=12) ■ 64-gradations (TYPE=12) F-6-5 This test print is for mainly checking the gradations of YMCBk single color at one time. Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced.
  • Page 520 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > Full color 16-gradations (TYPE=14) ■ Full color 16-gradations (TYPE=14) White Light areas White F-6-6 This test print is for mainly checking the gray balance, gradations of YMCBk singe color and fogging. Check item Check method Assumed cause...

  • Page 521: Image Failure

    Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Color displacement in image due to a failure of Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front) /(Rear) 6-10 Troubleshooting Items Image Failure ■ Color displacement in image due to a failure of Registration List of Troubleshooting Items Patch Sensor Unit (Front) /(Rear) Category Description...
  • Page 522 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Fixing wrinkle due to foreign matter attached to the Fixing Inlet Guide 6-11 ■ Fixing wrinkle due to foreign matter attached to the Fixing Inlet [Field Remedy] Following shows remedies in the order of priority: Guide 1.
  • Page 523 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Fixing wrinkle in envelopes due to a problem of feedability between the secondary transfer nip and the fixing nip 6-12 ■ Fixing wrinkle in envelopes due to a problem of feedability between the secondary transfer nip and the fixing nip F-6-11 [Location] Fixing nip...

  • Page 524: Wrinkle When Printing Yougata Envelopes

    Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Wrinkle when printing Yougata envelopes 6-13 ■ Wrinkle when printing Yougata envelopes • Multi-purpose Tray When wrinkle occurs to envelopes loaded in a normal direction, change the direction [Location] to load them by rotating by 180 degrees as shown below. Cassette 1, Multi-purpose Tray [Cause] Yougata envelopes (COM10 No.10/Yougatanaga 3/Monarch/DL/ISO-C5) have been loaded...

  • Page 525: Dark Spots On Halftone Image

    Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Dark spots on halftone image 6-14 ■ Dark spots on halftone image F-6-15 [Condition] The symptom tends to occur under a combination of conditions including a low humidity environment, the ITB being in the initial phase (the surface resistance is high), and the drum unit being in the terminal phase of its use (the electric charge of toner is low).
  • Page 526 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Fogging surrounding high density images in low humidity environment 6-15 [Field Remedy] ■ Fogging surrounding high density images in low humidity 1) In Service Mode(LEVEL2): COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR_xxxx, set "-3". environment The setting range is from "-50"...
  • Page 527 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Image Failure > Fogging surrounding high density images in low humidity environment 6-16 [Condition] NOTE: Leaving in a low humidity environment increases the surface resistance of paper and so it Improving a state of preservation of paper may be effective in resolving a trouble in becomes more likely to generate the symptom.

  • Page 528: Category: Malfunction

    Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Items > Category: Malfunction > Not able to remove the ITB Unit due to the Primary Transfer Roller disengagement failure 6-17 Category: Malfunction ■ Not able to remove the ITB Unit due to the Primary Transfer Roller disengagement failure [Location] ITB Unit [Cause/Condition]...

  • Page 529: Overview Of Version Upgrade

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade 6-18 Version Upgrade Overview ■ Overview of Version Upgrade The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software. ● Downloading System Software This machine supports the following 3 downloading methods.

  • Page 530: Download Mode

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Overview > System Software Configuration 6-19 ■ Download mode When upgrading the version using SST or USB memory storage device, it is necessary to enter download mode. ● Starting the download mode Enter download mode by selecting Copier > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD in service mode (recommended). Press and hold 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad, and turn ON the power switch.

  • Page 531: Version Upgrade Via Sst

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview 6-20 Version Upgrade via SST ■ Note on download process ■ Overview CAUTION: Never turn OFF the power during the download/ writing process The system software can be downloaded via SST in either of the two modes below. Turning OFF the power during the download/ writing process of the system software •...

  • Page 532: Downloading System Software

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Registering System Software 6-21 ● Downloading System Software ■ Registering System Software The system software is stored in the temporary storage space of the FLASH PCB immediately ● System file storage folder to SST after downloading from the PC.
  • Page 533 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection 6-22 4) Select the folder containing the system software and click the “Search” button. ■ Connection The following IP address is automatically assigned for this machine at startup in download mode.

  • Page 534: Downloading System Software (Assist Mode)

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode) 6-23 Procedure ■ Downloading System Software (Assist mode) 1) Connect this machine and the PC with SST installed with the cross cable. 1) Start this machine and enter download mode. (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > 2) Turn ON the main power switch of this machine.
  • Page 535 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode) 6-24 4) Click the “Start” button. 5) Click the “Next” button. F-6-26 F-6-27 Writing process is started when download is completed. 6) Disconnect the cross cable from the machine. The machine is restarted twice during the writing process (at completion of writing processes 7) Enter service mode to check the version of the system software.

  • Page 536: Downloading System Software (In Single Mode)

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (in single mode) 6-25 ■ Downloading System Software (in single mode) NOTE: The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen. The following is the sample steps to download the DCON (the other components of the •...

  • Page 537: Formatting Hdd

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-26 ■ Formatting HDD NOTE: Download confirmation modes Download is confirmed in any of the following 2 modes: ● Overview • Downloading of the difference only: “Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to Only HDD formatting is available on this machine.
  • Page 538 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-27 ● Steps of Formatting 5) Click the “Execute Format” button. 1) Enter download mode. 2) Connect the PC to the machine and start SST. 3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”. Check the network settings and click the “Start”...
  • Page 539 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup 6-28 ■ Backup ● Steps to Upload Data ● Overview CAUTION: When replacing the Controller PCB, the data stored in the PCB can be temporary saved and Do not select Sublog.bin migrated to the new PCB by using the backup function.
  • Page 540 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup 6-29 3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”. Check the network settings and click the 5) Select “MeapBack.bin” and click the “Start” button. “Start” button. F-6-38 6) Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary. Click the “Save” button. F-6-36 4) Click the “Upload Data”...
  • Page 541 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup 6-30 ● Steps to Download Data 4) Click the “Download Data” button. CAUTION: The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data was uploaded. Listed below are the sample steps to download MeapBack. 1) Enter download mode.

  • Page 542: Optional Language Support

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Optional language support 6-31 ■ Optional language support The elimination of normal languages and optional languages There are 2 kinds of language modules. One is the basic module which saved in system area, This is the explanation on how to download optional language firmware prepared locally by the other is the indication module which saved in other area.
  • Page 543 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Optional language support 6-32 ● Optional language selection The number of the selectable optional languages in the "Optional Language Setting" is equivalent to the maximum number of optional languages. The number of the optional languages to be added to the machine is equivalent to the "Optional Language Setting"...

  • Page 544: Version Upgrade Using Usb Memory Storage Device

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory storage device 6-33 Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device ● Firmware to be exported to USB memory ■ Relation between SST and USB memory storage device When the firmware of the selected optional language in "Optional Language Setting"...
  • Page 545 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Registering System Software 6-34 ● Downloading System Software ■ Registering System Software The system software is updated according to the set of versions selected from the USB ●...
  • Page 546 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Registering System Software 6-35 4) Select the folder in which the system software is saved and click the “Search” button. 6) Click the “OK” button when the message telling completion of system software registration is displayed.
  • Page 547 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Registering System Software 6-36 ● SST to USB memory storage device 4) Click the USB icon shown in “Select the target” screen. Register the system software registered in SST to the USB memory storage device. NOTE: Although only one version of software can be saved with the existing machines, multiple versions of software can be saved simultaneously in the USB memory storage device...
  • Page 548 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Registering System Software 6-37 6) Select the “Series”. 8) Wait for approx. 1 minute so the firmware to be written is displayed. When the following screen is displayed, click start button. F-6-54 7) Select the version to register.
  • Page 549 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Connection 6-38 ■ Connection 5) When the machine recognizes the USB memory storage device, the following menu is displayed on the control panel. CAUTION: [[[[[[[[[[[ Root Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB memory ----------------------------------------- [1] : Select Version...

  • Page 550: Upgrading System Software

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software 6-39 ■ Upgrading System Software ● Points to Note When Operating/ Using System Software ● Menu/ Function Overview NOTE: For normal download of system software, it is recommended to execute from the [[[[[[[[[[[ Root Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ----------------------------------------- download menu --- [1]: Upgrade (Auto).

  • Page 551: Selecting System Software

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Downloading/ Writing System Software (Automatic) 6-40 ■ Selecting System Software ■ Downloading/ Writing System Software (Automatic) ● [1]: Select Version ● [1]: Upgrade (Auto) Select the version to be used (from the system software versions saved in the USB memory). The versions are compared among the host machine, options and the system software in the USB memory storage device, and only the newest version of the system software in the USB memory is downloaded to the temporary storage space in the FLASH PCB.
  • Page 552 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Downloading/ Writing System Software (Automatic) 6-41 During the download process, download status is displayed on the control panel. ● [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) The versions are compared among the host machine, options and system software in the Writing to the system software area on the FLASH PCB is started once download is USB memory storage device, and newest version of the system software is downloaded to completed.

  • Page 553: Formatting Flash Pcb Or Hdd

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Formatting FLASH PCB or HDD 6-42 ● [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) ■ Formatting FLASH PCB or HDD Regardless of the system software version in the machine, all the system software in the USB ●...
  • Page 554 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Formatting FLASH PCB or HDD 6-43 ● [1]: Disk Format ● [2]: FLASH Format To format the entire HDD To clear all the user data in the FLASH PCB Executing format on the machine in use deletes all the user data in the HDD as well as the Executing format with the machine in use deletes all the user data in the FLASH PCB as well MEAP application (caution);...

  • Page 555: Backup/ Restore

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB Memory Storage Device > Other menus 6-44 ■ Backup/ Restore The following message is displayed when the backup process is completed. ● [5]: Backup/Restore Backup/Restoration of the data in the FLASH can be executed. It is used to temporarily save the data stored in the FLASH to the HDD and to restore it after replacement.

  • Page 556: Version Upgrade Via Cds

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Overview 6-45 Version Upgrade via CDS ■ Overview Among the 4 methods in which service technicians provide firmware install services, the following 3 methods are available using Updater functions. a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update) b.
  • Page 557 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation 6-46 ■ Preparation ● Setting Sales Company’s HQ When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s ● Overview of Preparation HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is The following should be prepared before using Updater.

  • Page 558: Network Settings

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation 6-47 ● Network Settings 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 1. Connecting to External Network The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection method.
  • Page 559 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation 6-48 5. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. [Delivery Server URL] button. If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] button to show the virtual keypad.
  • Page 560 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation 6-49 5. Press [Yes] button. ● Enabling UGW Link When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW- linked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link. Setting of Device COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW Service Mode...
  • Page 561 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) 6-50 ■ a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update) ■ b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked Download and Update”. See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked download”.
  • Page 562 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) 6-51 2. Press [Updater] button. 5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button. F-6-80 F-6-83 3. Press [Update Firmware] button. 6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied.
  • Page 563 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-52 ■ c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service 3. Press [Update Firmware] button. Mode) The figure below shows the operational flow of “Manual Download and Update”. STEP 1 STEP 2 Download using...
  • Page 564 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-53 5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button. 6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button. F-6-89 •...
  • Page 565 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-54 7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button. • [E-mail]: E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here. Enter the E-mail address of the service technician in charge.
  • Page 566 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-55 8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept] • When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and button.
  • Page 567 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-56 STEP 2: Update using Updater 4. Press [Apply Firmware] button. The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions. When Timing to Apply is set to [Auto] in Distribution Setting in STEP 1, the firmware is updated automatically.

  • Page 568: Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule 6-57 7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware. ■ Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule 1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel. This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater.

  • Page 569: Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware) 6-58 5. Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press [Yes] button. ■ Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware) This section describes how to update the downloaded firmware. 1.

  • Page 570: Deleting Downloaded Firmware

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Downloaded Firmware 6-59 5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button. ■ Deleting Downloaded Firmware This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2.
  • Page 571 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Downloaded Firmware 6-60 5. Confirm the downloaded firmware to be deleted and press [Yes] button. F-6-107 6. Confirm the result of deletion and press [OK] button. Now the downloaded firmware is successfully deleted.

  • Page 572: Troubleshooting On Firmware Installation

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation 6-61 ■ Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation <UI menu> <Service Mode> No.1 Symptom: I can’t find the firmware to be updated using Updater. Cause: Preparation has not been properly done. Action: Confirm the setting of Sales Company’s HQ bellow.

  • Page 573: Information Required For Reports

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Information required for Reports 6-62 No.4 ■ Information required for Reports Symptom: Firmware has not been downloaded according to the distribution schedule. ● Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site Cause: Other firmware distribution schedule is set.Since only 1 distribution schedule is held, •...

  • Page 574: Debug Logs

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Debug Logs 6-63 ■ Debug Logs NOTE: • See the section of "Setting Log Level" under “Various Setting”, “System Management ● Obtaining Log Files Operations” of “Updater” of Chapter 2 “Technology” of this manual for more details of Updater log files can be obtained by copy &...

  • Page 575: Error Messages

    Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-64 ■ Error Messages Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list. Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred with the delivery In communicating with the...
  • Page 576 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-65 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy Delivery Server : Connect Failed Communication test, etc. In the communication test, failed to connect Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute the job. File Server : Retrieve Failed (communication test result to the delivery server.
  • Page 577 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-66 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred. communication test, etc. The max value (space/file) was exceeded Check if the log file exceeded the max value. Error Code: [xxx] (main screen) and new log was not accepted.
  • Page 578 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-67 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy On-site (error dialogue) An internal error occurred at the time of Re-execute the job. acquiring applicable firmware information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Information required for Reports" under “Version Upgrade via CDS”, “Version Upgrade”...
  • Page 579 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-68 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred. Check the Update UGW linkage (main eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause, resend Firmware screen screen) connect to server.
  • Page 580 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-69 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy Delivery Error UGW linkage (Update eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause, resend Error Code: [xxx] Firmware screen) connect to the server.
  • Page 581 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code 6-70 ■ Error Code ● Explanation on Error Codes and Their Remedies The following shows the error codes displayed on CDS error dialogs and the Control Panel of the device (local UI) and explanation of those error codes. ●...
  • Page 582 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code 6-71 ● Remedy by Error Code Remedy to Be Taken When an Error Code Starting with [81------] Is Displayed The remedy for an error code whose first two digits are "81" is shown below. 1) Refer to "List of Error Codes Starting with 81", and try the remedy.

  • Page 583: Error Code List

    • Characters other than single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols are used for E-mail Address (mailAddress). (Canon Inc. Only) In the case of an error in Firm Type, Firmware • An invalid e-mail address was input (The domain name is missing, . (dot) was input instead of , (comma), etc.) Version, or Firmware Group Version, register the correct firmware again.
  • Page 584 (Attach information on the time of occurrence and the serial number of the device.) (Canon Inc. Only) Check registration of LMS. 81--1009 The retrieval type in the data entry items is special and there are no basic-set applicable to the registration ID and Enter correct ID and the password.
  • Page 585 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code List 6-74 Error Code Description Remedy Cause of error server DATER 81--1020 When the status of the scheduled update information is "Waiting to Transmit" or "New". Contact the support department of the sales company. 81--1021 When the status of the scheduled update information is "Set".
  • Page 586 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code List 6-75 ● List of Error Codes Starting with a Number Other than 81 The list of error codes starting with a number other than 81 is shown below. If such an error has occurred, search the remedy using the last four digits of the error code. Report the error to the support department of the sales company with the Sublog and update log of the device.
  • Page 587 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code List 6-76 Error Code Description Remedy Cause of error Network server DATER 8X--4207 An unknown host error in performing the web method • Check the network environment of the device and start the operation again •...
  • Page 588 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code List 6-77 Error Code Description Remedy Cause of error Network server DATER 8X--Socket communication 6101 Failed to connect the eRDS Contact the support department of the sales company. 6102 No response from eRDS (Attach the Sublog and update log of the device.) 6103 No notice of start from the eRDS...
  • Page 589 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code List 6-78 ● List of Error Codes Related to Local CDS A list of error codes related to Local CDS is shown below. Error Code Description Remedy 81--F003 Firmware information not registered.
  • Page 590 Troubleshooting > Version Upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code List 6-79 ● Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them Scenes Where an Error Occurs When an error code not included in the error code list is displayed, one of the errors shown in the following scenes may have occurred. Scenes Where an Error Occurs Scenes Where an Error Occurs Content...

  • Page 591: Controller Self Diagnosis

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview 6-80 Controller Self Diagnosis ■ Overview Two types of error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations Controller Self Diagnosis shown below. ■ Introduction DC Controler PCB Operation of the (2 types of) error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for errors are described.
  • Page 592 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Layout Drawing 6-81 Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the red frame (solid line) ■ Layout Drawing in the figure. Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis blue frame (dotted line).

  • Page 593: Basic Flowchart

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Prerequisite 6-82 ■ Basic Flowchart ■ Prerequisite Check all of the items shown below. This machine’s Firmware is intalled in Flash PCB. Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool (BCT) is also installed at the same time when System Turn ON the main power switch.

  • Page 594: Boot Method

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Boot System Error Diagnosis 6-83 Operation ● Diagnosis Time Diagnosis is completed in approx. 1 minuites. Operations of the two diagnosis tools are explained below. <When the diagnosis result is normal> Use each tool according to the following purposes. After the Main Power Supply Lamp repeatedly lights out 4 times, it lights up and the •...
  • Page 595 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis 6-84 ● Error Diagnosis ■ Controller System Error Diagnosis Boot System Error Diagnosis Table: ● Boot Method The error locations are identified according to the following table. 1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys ‘2’ and ‘4’ simultaneously.
  • Page 596 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis 6-85 <When an error is detected by diagnosis> ● Controller System Error Diagnosis Table Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the The error locations are identified according to the following table. name of the test where an error was detected is indicated.
  • Page 597 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Restrictions 6-86 ■ Restrictions ● Boot System Error Diagnosis If an error cannot be resolved by executing remedy according to the error diagnosis table described above, consider boot failure of the main power supply and take appropriate actions. ●...

  • Page 598: Check The Lighting Of The Led On The Main Controller

    Troubleshooting > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Overview > Check the lighting of the LED on the Main Controller 6-87 Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs ■ Check the lighting of the LED on the Main Controller Overview You may be able to determine the remedies against Main Controller-related troubles by checking the lighting status of LEDs on the PCB.

  • Page 599: Scope Of Application

    Debug Log * Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up. Scope of Application With imageRUNNER ADVANCE, Sublog can be saved in the HDD using the standard ■...

  • Page 600: Description Of Log To Be Collected

    Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Storing System Information > Operation to Save System Information 6-89 ■ Description of Log to be Collected The log consists of the number of logs as shown below; from the latest log extended to the older logs.
  • Page 601 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Storing System Information > Operation to Save System Information 6-90 ● Workflow to Start the Machine with the 2 and 8 Keys ● Reacquiring Debug Log F-6-128 F-6-129 6-90 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Storing System Information > Operation to Save System Information...

  • Page 602: Collecting System Information

    2. Hold down the [Counter] button (10 sec. or longer). • Store the setting file, which was sent from the Canon field support department through the 3. Press 1 on the numeric keypad.

  • Page 603: File Name

    Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) > Manual Saving by Holding Down the Counter + 1.2.3 6-92 6. A file is generated in root of the USB memory device. ● Status Display on the Control Panel 7.

  • Page 604: Collecting By Download Mode (Usb Memory Device)

    Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Collecting by Download Mode (USB memory device) > Function 6-93 Collecting by Download Mode (USB memory device) 4. Download sublog. Press the control panel keys. [1] -> [0]: ■ Function [[[[[[[ Download File Menu (USB) ]]]]]]] This is a function to collect debug log from a device in download mode.

  • Page 605: Operation Procedure

    Troubleshooting > Debug Log > LOG2USB > Function 6-94 DBG-LOG Screen ● Operation Procedure a) Insert a USB memory device for log collection to the machine. ■ Function Note: ● Service mode LEVEL 2 When inserting a USB memory device, wait for 10 seconds or so because it takes several seconds for the machine to recognize the USB memory device after it was COPIER >...
  • Page 606 To remove the USB memory device, exit the service mode screen and perform the operation for removing memory media on the screen. a) Save the log setting file (e.g. "800.conf") provided by the Canon quality-appointed staff into a USB memory device.
  • Page 607 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > LOG-TRIG > Function 6-96 LOG-TRIG Number Timing to automatically store the log 100-199 Exception + E-code + reboot ■ Function Default setting (at the time of shipment) Exception only E-code only This is a function to change the settings on debug log and then start a log collection operation Reboot only with the new settings.
  • Page 608 1) is disabled; therefore, clear the default settings and then execute steps 1) and 2) again. When a Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need to use this function, the setting file for SYSLOG is provided through the sales company HQ.

  • Page 609: An Example Of Automatic Log Collection Setting

    Troubleshooting > Debug Log > An Example of Automatic Log Collection Setting 6-98 LOG-DEL 3. Execute the service mode setting as follows. Service mode LEVEL 2 This is a function to delete log files that have been automatically stored. The settings on log COPIER >...

  • Page 610: Uploading Data By Sst

    Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Uploading Data by SST > Preconditions: 6-99 Uploading Data by SST 6. Hold down the counter + 1.2.3 to transfer the log in the HDD of the machine to the USB memory. The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver. 4.73 or 7.
  • Page 611 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Uploading Data by SST > Preconditions: 6-100 2. Press the Upload Data button. 3. Select the data to be uploaded, then click [Start] button. When there is no log in the machine, it results in blank option items for "data to upload". When the file name is longer than the frame, it displays that it is a log in the comment column just below.
  • Page 612 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Uploading Data by SST > Preconditions: 6-101 4. Select "Upload Log file and LogList file". 6. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button. The list of logs stored in the log file of the machine (description of LogList files) is displayed. F-6-147 7.

  • Page 613: Saving A Log Of Key Operations

    • When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to determine the cause. This is intended to improve efficiency in log collection when a trouble occurs.
  • Page 614 Troubleshooting > Debug Log > Saving a Log of Key Operations > Usage Method 6-103 2. Starting to Save Key Operation Log 4. Collecting Key Operation Log with SST or USB Memory See " Debuglog Collection (SST) " or " Debuglog Collection (USB) " for details. Here is an example of using USB memory to collect.
  • Page 615 Error•Jam•Alarm ■ Overview ■ Error Code ■ Jam Code ■ Alarm Code Error•Jam•Alarm...

  • Page 616: Pickup Position Code

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Overview > Outline > Points to Note When Clearing HDD Overview ■ Pickup position code When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code. Outline In the jam display screen, the “P” row corresponds to the pickup position code. Pickup position Pickup position code ■...
  • Page 617 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Error Code Error Detail Location Item Description code Code E001 A002 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) high temperature detection error Error Code Details Detection The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) detected 290 deg C or higher description for 0.1 sec or longer.
  • Page 618 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E001 A003 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) high temperature detection error E001 A004 05 Title Fixing Main Thermistor high temperature detection error Detection The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) detected 290 deg C or higher Detection...
  • Page 619 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E001 A005 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) high temperature detection error E001 A006 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) high temperature detection error Detection The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) detected 295 deg C or Detection...
  • Page 620 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E002 A001 05 Title Fixing Main Thermistor temperature increase detection error E002 A002 05 Title Fixing Main Thermistor open circuit detection error Detection The Fixing Main Thermistor detected a temperature increase Detection...
  • Page 621 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E002 A003 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) open circuit detection error E002 A004 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) open circuit detection error Detection The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) detected a temperature of Detection...
  • Page 622 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E003 A001 05 Title Fixing Main Thermistor low temperature detection error (during E003 A002 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) low temperature detection error printing) Detection The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) detected a temperature of 80...
  • Page 623 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E003 A003 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) low temperature detection error E004 0001 05 Title Fixing Relay welding detection error Detection The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) detected a temperature of 80 Detection...
  • Page 624 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-10 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E009 0001 05 Title Fixing pressure timeout error E009 0002 05 Title Fixing disengagement timeout error Detection Signal of the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor could not Detection Signal of the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor could not be...
  • Page 625 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-11 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E009 0003 05 Title Fixing pressure retry error Remedy [Related parts] - Main Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE Detection Signal of the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor could not ASSEMBLY)
  • Page 626 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-12 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E010 0002 05 Title Bk Drum_ITB Motor error Remedy [Related parts] - Main Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE Detection The specified speed could not be detected for 500 consecutive ASSEMBLY)
  • Page 627 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-13 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E010 0003 05 Title Bk Drum_ITB Motor error Remedy [Related parts] - Main Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE Detection There was no FG signal input for 300 msec from the startup of ASSEMBLY)
  • Page 628 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-14 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E012 0001 05 Title CL Drum Motor error Remedy [Related parts] - Main Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE Detection It did not become the specified speed for 500 consecutive msec ASSEMBLY)
  • Page 629 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-15 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E012 0002 05 Title CL Drum Motor error Remedy [Related parts] - Main Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE Detection The specified speed could not be detected for 500 consecutive ASSEMBLY)
  • Page 630 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-16 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E012 0003 05 Title CL Drum Motor error Remedy [Related parts] - Main Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE Detection There was no FG signal input for 300 msec from the startup of ASSEMBLY)
  • Page 631 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-17 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E014 0001 05 Title Fixing Motor error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 632 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-18 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E014 0002 05 Title Fixing Motor error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 633 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-19 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E014 0003 05 Title Fixing Motor error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 634 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-20 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E020 01A8 05 Title ATR Sensor (Y)output error E020 01B8 05 Title ATR Sensor (Y) output error Detection The output value of the ATR Sensor (Y) in the Drum Unit (Y) did Detection...
  • Page 635 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-21 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E020 01C0 05 Title Error in take-up of Sealing Member (Y) E020 02A8 05 Title ATR Sensor (M) output error Detection The patch output value (SigR) failed to be 900 or less during Detection...
  • Page 636 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-22 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E020 02B8 05 Title ATR Sensor (M) output error E020 02C0 05 Title Error in take-up of Sealing Member (M) Detection a.
  • Page 637 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-23 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E020 03A8 05 Title ATR Sensor (C) output error E020 03B8 05 Title ATR Sensor (C) output error Detection The output value of the ATR Sensor (C) in the Drum Unit (C) did Detection...
  • Page 638 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-24 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E020 03C0 05 Title Error in take-up of Sealing Member (C) E020 04A8 05 Title ATR Sensor (Bk) output error Detection The patch output value (SigR) failed to be 900 or less during Detection...
  • Page 639 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-25 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E020 04B8 05 Title ATR Sensor (Bk) output error E020 04F0 05 Title Error in toner density (Bk) at communication failure of the Drum Unit Memory PCB (Bk) Detection a.
  • Page 640 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-26 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E021 0001 05 Title Developing Motor error Remedy [Related parts] - Main Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE Detection It did not become the specified speed for 500 consecutive ASSEMBLY)
  • Page 641 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-27 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E021 0002 05 Title Developing Motor error Remedy [Related parts] - Main Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE Detection The specified speed could not be detected for 500 consecutive ASSEMBLY)
  • Page 642 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-28 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E021 0003 05 Title Developing Motor error Remedy [Related parts] - Main Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE Detection There was no FG signal input for 300 msec from the startup of ASSEMBLY)
  • Page 643 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-29 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E021 0120 05 Title Developing Screw rotation detection error (Y) E021 0220 05 Title Developing Screw rotation detection error (M) Detection The difference between the maximum and the minimum of Detection...
  • Page 644 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-30 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E021 0320 05 Title Developing Screw rotation detection error (C) E021 0420 05 Title Developing Screw rotation detection error (Bk) Detection The difference between the maximum and the minimum of Detection...
  • Page 645 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-31 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E025 0110 05 Title Bottle Motor (YM) error (Y) E025 0168 05 Title No toner detection error (Y) Detection The Bottle Rotation Sensor (Y) did not detect rotation for 5 Detection...
  • Page 646 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-32 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E025 0210 05 Title Bottle Motor (YM) error (M) E025 0268 05 Title No toner detection error (M) Detection The Bottle Rotation Sensor (M) did not detect rotation for 5 Detection...
  • Page 647 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-33 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E025 0310 05 Title Bottle Motor (CK) error (C) E025 0368 05 Title No toner detection error (C) Detection The Bottle Rotation Sensor (C) did not detect rotation for 5 Detection...
  • Page 648 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-34 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E025 0410 05 Title Bottle Motor (CK) error (Bk) E025 0468 05 Title No toner detection error (Bk) Detection The Bottle Rotation Sensor (Bk) did not detect rotation for 5 Detection...
  • Page 649 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-35 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E029 5008 05 Title Registration Patch Sensor (Front) light intensity error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 650 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-36 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E029 7008 05 Title Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) light intensity error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 651 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-37 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E073 0001 05 Title Interlock error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Detection No detection of Interlock (24 V) although all the Doors (Front 1.
  • Page 652 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-38 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E074 0000 05 Title Primary Transfer Roller disengagement control error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 653 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-39 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E074 0002 05 Title Error in Primary Transfer Roller operation Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 654 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-40 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E100 0001 05 Title BD error E102 0001 05 Title EEPROM error Detection The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once. Detection An error has occurred in EEPROM of the Laser Scanner.
  • Page 655 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-41 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E110 0001 05 Title Scanner Motor error E110 0002 05 Title Scanner Motor error Detection The speed was not locked by FG control within 5.5 sec after Detection The speed was not locked by BD control within 5.5 sec after description...
  • Page 656 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-42 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E110 0003 05 Title Scanner Motor error E193 0001 05 Title Image ASIC communication error Detection The phase was not locked by BD control within 5.5 sec after Detection Communication between the DC Controller PCB (CPU) and description...
  • Page 657 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-43 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0000 05 Title EEPROM communication error E196 0001 05 Title EEPROM communication error Detection The NACK (a negative reply sent by the reception side to the Detection Although access to the DCON EEPROM from the DC Controller description...
  • Page 658 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-44 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0002 05 Title EEPROM communication error E196 0003 05 Title EEPROM communication error Detection Although write polling to the DCON EEPROM from the DC Detection EEPROM data in DCON could not be read at startup.
  • Page 659 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-45 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0100 05 Title EEPROM communication error E196 0101 05 Title EEPROM communication error Detection The NACK (a negative reply sent by the reception side to the Detection Although access to the SCNR EEPROM from the DC Controller description...
  • Page 660 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-46 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0102 05 Title EEPROM communication error E196 010F 05 Title EEPROM communication error Detection Although write polling to the SCNR EEPROM from the DC Detection The number of read/write job data to the SCNR EEPROM description...
  • Page 661 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-47 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0200 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 662 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-48 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0201 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 663 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-49 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0202 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 664 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-50 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 020F 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 665 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-51 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0301 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 666 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-52 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0302 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 667 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-53 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 030F 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 668 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-54 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0401 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 669 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-55 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0402 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 670 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-56 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 040F 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 671 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-57 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0501 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 672 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-58 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0502 05 Title EEPROM communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 673 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-59 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 050F 05 Title EEPROM communication error E196 0601 05 Title EEPROM communication error Detection The number of read/write job data to the PCRG_Bk EEPROM Detection Although access to the RTC from the DC Controller PCB (CPU) description...
  • Page 674 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-60 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0602 05 Title EEPROM communication error E196 0800 05 Title EEPROM communication error Detection Although write polling to the RTC from the DC Controller PCB Detection The NACK (a negative reply sent by the reception side to the description...
  • Page 675 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-61 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E196 0801 05 Title EEPROM communication error E196 0802 05 Title EEPROM communication error Detection Although access to the HVT EEPROM from the DC Controller Detection Although write polling to the HVT EEPROM from the DC description...
  • Page 676 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-62 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E197 0000 05 Title Communication error E197 1F00 05 Title Communication error Detection Although access to KONA1 (ASIC) in the DC Controller PCB Detection Although access to KONA2 (ASIC) in the DC Controller PCB description...
  • Page 677 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-63 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E197 2000 05 Title Communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Detection Although access to KONA3 (ASIC) in the Cassette Module 1.
  • Page 678 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-64 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E197 2101 05 Title Communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Detection Although access to KONA3 (ASIC) in the Cassette Module 1.
  • Page 679 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-65 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E197 2F00 05 Title Communication error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Detection Although access to KONA3 (ASIC) in the Cassette Module 1.
  • Page 680 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-66 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E202 0001 04 Title Scanner Unit HP error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 681 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-67 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E202 0002 04 Title Scanner Unit HP error Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 682 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-68 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E240 0000 00 Title Controller communication error E240 0005 00 Title Controller communication error Detection A sequence error with the controller occurred. Detection A sequence error with the controller occurred.
  • Page 683 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-69 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E240 0D00 00 Title Controller communication error E246 0003 00 Title System error Detection A sequence error with the controller occurred. Detection System error description...
  • Page 684 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-70 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E248 0002 04 Title Reader backup error E280 0005 04 Title Scanner Unit communication error Detection The Controller IC of the Main Controller PCB failed to rewrite Detection 1.
  • Page 685 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-71 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E301 0002 04 Title Reading light intensity error E315 000D 00 Title Image processing device error Detection Image sampling for shading was not completed.
  • Page 686 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-72 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E315 0027 00 Title Image processing device error E315 0530 00 Title Device timeout error Detection ROTU timeout error. Detection An image synchronous signal from the Main Controller PCB to description...
  • Page 687 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-73 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E350 0003 00 Title System error E530 0001 02 Title Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor error Detection System error Detection The Front Alignment Motor did not move from the HP.
  • Page 688 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-74 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E537 0001 02 Title Rear Alignment Motor error E575 0001 02 Title Gripper Motor error Detection The Rear Alignment Motor did not move from the HP. Detection The Gripper Motor did not move from the HP.
  • Page 689 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-75 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E577 0002 02 Title Paddle Motor error E602 0001 00 Title HDD error Detection The Paddle Motor did not return to the HP. Detection HDD failed to be Ready, or HDD was not formatted.
  • Page 690 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-76 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E602 0101 00 Title HDD error E602 0111 00 Title HDD error Detection Error in system area (Initialization failed at startup, or I/O error Detection Error in system area (file could not be written in the HDD after description...
  • Page 691 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-77 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E602 0201 00 Title HDD error Remedy [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (UN81/J7008 and Detection Error in SWAP (temporary file/memory alternative area) J7018) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SATA...
  • Page 692 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-78 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E602 0211 00 Title HDD error Remedy [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (UN81/J7008 and Detection Error in SWAP (temporary file/memory alternative area) J7018) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SATA...
  • Page 693 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-79 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E602 0301 00 Title HDD error E602 0311 00 Title HDD error Detection Error in MEAP-related area (Initialization failed at startup, or I/O Detection Error in MEAP-related area (file could not be written in the HDD description...
  • Page 694 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-80 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 0401 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in logical partition (Initialization failed at startup, or I/O - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 695 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-81 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E602 0411 00 Title HDD error E602 0501 00 Title HDD error Detection Error in logical partition (file could not be written in the HDD Detection Error in image data storage area (Initialization failed at startup, description...
  • Page 696 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-82 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 0511 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in image data storage area (file could not be written in the - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 697 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-83 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 0601 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in PDL-related file storage area (Initialization failed at - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 698 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-84 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 0611 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in PDL-related file storage area (file could not be written in - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 699 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-85 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 0701 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in image data storage area (Initialization failed at startup, - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 700 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-86 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 0711 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in image data storage area (file could not be written in the - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 701 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-87 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 0801 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in PDL spool data (temporary file) (Initialization failed at - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 702 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-88 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 0811 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in PDL spool data (temporary file) (file could not be written - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 703 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-89 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 0901 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in general application temporary area (temporary file) - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 704 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-90 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 0911 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in general application temporary area (temporary file) (file - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 705 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-91 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 1001 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in SEND-related area (Initialization failed at startup, or I/O - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 706 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-92 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 1011 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in SEND-related area (file could not be written in the HDD - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 707 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-93 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 1101 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in general application-related area (Initialization failed at - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 708 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-94 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 1111 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in general application-related area (file could not be - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 709 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-95 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 1201 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in update-related area (Initialization failed at startup, or I/O - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 710 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-96 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 1211 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in update-related area (file could not be written in the HDD - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 711 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-97 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 1301 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in license-related area (Initialization failed at startup, or I/ - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 712 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-98 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E602 1311 00 Title HDD error E602 1401 00 Title HDD error Detection Error in license-related area (file could not be written in the HDD Detection Error in debug log area (Initialization failed at startup, or I/O description...
  • Page 713 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-99 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 1411 00 Title HDD error whether the error is cleared. Detection Error in debug log area (file could not be written in the HDD - Although the error is cleared by “HD-CHECK”, it may occur...
  • Page 714 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-100 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking E602 2000 00 Title Authentication error between the host machine and the whether the error is cleared.
  • Page 715 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-101 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E602 FF01 00 Title HDD error E602 FF11 00 Title HDD error Detection HDD error was detected at startup. (unidentified) (at startup) Detection HDD error (unidentified) (after startup) description...

  • Page 716: E614 Error Code

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-102 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E611 0000 07 Title Fax transmission retry error E614 0002 00 Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB Detection Rebooting and retransmission were repeated 3 times in a short Detection...
  • Page 717 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-103 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E614 0101 00 Title Flash PCB error E614 0111 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection Error in system area (Initialization failed at startup, or I/O error Detection Error in system area (file could not be written in the Flash PCB description...
  • Page 718 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-104 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E614 0201 00 Title Flash PCB error E614 0211 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection Error in system area (Initialization failed at startup, or I/O error Detection Error in system area (file could not be written in the Flash PCB description...
  • Page 719 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-105 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E614 0301 00 Title Flash PCB error E614 0311 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection Error in system area (Initialization failed at startup, or I/O error Detection Error in system area (file could not be written in the Flash PCB description...
  • Page 720 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-106 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E614 0401 00 Title Flash PCB error E614 0411 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection Error in logical partition (Initialization failed at startup, or I/O Detection Error in logical partition (file could not be written in the Flash description...
  • Page 721 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-107 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Related parts] E614 0511 00 Title Flash PCB error - Flash PCB (UN96) Detection Error in general application-related area (file could not be - Main Controller PCB (UN81) (Unit of replacement: MAIN description written in the Flash PCB after startup, or I/O error after startup)
  • Page 722 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-108 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Related parts] E614 0601 00 Title Flash PCB error - Flash PCB (UN96) Detection Error in license-related area (Initialization failed at startup, or I/ - Main Controller PCB (UN81) (Unit of replacement: MAIN description O error at startup)
  • Page 723 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-109 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E614 0611 00 Title Flash PCB error E614 0701 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection Error in license-related area (file could not be written in the Detection Error in system setting value (service mode, etc.) storage area description...
  • Page 724 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-110 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Related parts] E614 0711 00 Title Flash PCB error - Flash PCB (UN96) Detection Error in system setting value (service mode, etc.) storage area - Main Controller PCB (UN81) (Unit of replacement: MAIN description (file could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup, or I/O...
  • Page 725 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-111 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Related parts] E614 4000 00 Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB - Flash PCB (UN96) Detection The OS could not be recognized.
  • Page 726 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-112 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E614 4002 00 Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB E614 4010 00 Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB Detection The OS kernel was not found.
  • Page 727 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-113 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E614 9000 00 Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB E614 9002 00 Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB Detection SRAM device access-related error (at startup) Detection...
  • Page 728 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-114 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E614 9004 00 Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB E614 FF01 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection Startup error Detection...
  • Page 729 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-115 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E614 FF11 00 Title Flash PCB error E615 0001 00 Title Error in self-diagnosis of the encryption module Detection Flash error (unidentified) (file could not be written in the Flash Detection...
  • Page 730 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-116 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E674 0004 07 Title Fax Board communication error E674 000C 07 Title Fax Board communication error Detection A communication error occurred when accessing the modem IC Detection A communication error occurred when accessing the modem IC...
  • Page 731 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-117 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code Remedy [Related parts] E719 0001 00 Title Coin vendor error - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) Detection The coin vendor which was connected before turning OFF the - Main Controller PCB (UN81) (Unit of replacement: MAIN...
  • Page 732 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-118 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E719 0003 00 Title Coin vendor error E719 0032 00 Title Card Reader communication error Detection A communication error with the coin vendor occurred during unit Detection Although communication with the Card Reader was possible description...
  • Page 733 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-119 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E720 0100 05 Title Cassette Pedestal detection error E730 A007 00 Title Mismatch of PDL version Detection Connection of the Cassette Pedestal could not be detected.
  • Page 734 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-120 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E732 0001 00 Title Scanner communication error E733 0000 00 Title Printer communication error Detection DDI-S communication error. Detection Communication between the DC Controller PCB and the Main description...
  • Page 735 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-121 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E733 0001 00 Title Printer communication error E733 0002 00 Title Printer communication error Detection - DDI-P communication error Detection DDI-P communication error (invalid packet) description...
  • Page 736 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-122 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E733 0F01 05 Title Printer communication error E744 4000 05 Title Error due to the DC Controller not compatible with the model Detection A communication error that can be recovered by reboot.
  • Page 737 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-123 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E746 0023 00 Title Image Analysis Board error E746 0031 00 Title TPM error Detection Communication from the Image Analysis Board could not be Detection A communication error has occurred between the Main description...
  • Page 738 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-124 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E746 0033 00 Title TPM error E746 0034 00 Title TPM auto recovery error Detection It was detected that data in TPM was inconsistent. Detection The error occurred when clearing HDD while TPM setting was description...
  • Page 739 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-125 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E748 2010 00 Title Flash PCB error / HDD error E749 0006 00 Title Error due to change in hardware configuration Detection IPL (startup program) was not found, or the HDD could not be Detection...
  • Page 740 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-126 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E806 0100 05 Title Drum Unit Suction Cooling Fan error E806 0101 05 Title Drum Unit Suction Cooling Fan error Detection The Drum Unit Suction Cooling Fan did not rotate for the Detection...
  • Page 741 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-127 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E806 0300 05 Title Delivery Cooling Fan error E806 0301 05 Title Delivery Cooling Fan error Detection The Delivery Cooling Fan did not rotate for the specified period Detection The Delivery Cooling Fan rotated for more than the specified...
  • Page 742 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-128 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E806 0400 05 Title Duplex Cooling Fan error E806 0401 05 Title Duplex Cooling Fan error Detection The Duplex Cooling Fan in the Right Cover did not rotate for the Detection The Duplex Cooling Fan in the Right Cover rotated for more...
  • Page 743 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-129 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E808 0001 05 Title Zero cross signal detection error E880 0001 00 Title Controller Cooling Fan error Detection An electrical trouble caused by zero cross signal error.
  • Page 744 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-130 Error Detail Error Detail Location Item Description Location Item Description code Code code Code E881 0001 00 Title Board over heat error E996 0CA2 05 Title Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer) Detection Abnormal temperature of CPU on the Main Controller PCB was Detection...
  • Page 745 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-131 Error Detail Location Item Description code Code E996 0CAD 05 Title Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer) Detection Error for collecting jam log (Printer) description Remedy [Remedy] Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting “COPIER (LEVEL2)>...

  • Page 746: Jam Type

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type 7-132 Jam Code Jam Type Type Detection description Possible symptoms Cause and remedy Delay(01xx) - The sensor was not turned ON • A paper is being caught on paper lint/foreign matters on the feed - Perform the following in the order while checking whether the jam is cleared.
  • Page 747 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type 7-133 PS12 PS11 PS01 PS04 PS05 PS10 F-7-1 PS03 PS02 F-7-2 7-133 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type...
  • Page 748 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type 7-134 PS101 7-134 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type...
  • Page 749 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type 7-135 F-7-3 PS101 PS102 PS103 F-7-4 7-135 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type...
  • Page 750 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type 7-136 F-7-5 7-136 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type...

  • Page 751: Jam Code

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Jam Code 7-137 ■ Jam Code ACCID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Address Remarks 0101 Delay Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor PS05 P005 1:paper 0102 Delay Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor PS101 P022 1:paper 0103...
  • Page 752 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Jam Code 7-138 ACCID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Address Remarks 0CC3 Sequence Software sequence error (Automatic adjustment: Last rotation-related) 0CC5 Sequence Software sequence error (Transfer-related) 0CC6 Sequence Software sequence error (Prevention of ITB displacement) 0CF1 Sequence...

  • Page 753: Detailed Jam Codes

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes 7-139 ■ Detailed Jam Codes ACCID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Address Remarks 0105 Delay Pre-Registration Sensor PS04 P010 1:paper 0205 Stationary Pre-Registration Sensor PS04 P010 1:paper 0A90 Power ON Pre-Registration Sensor...
  • Page 754 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes 7-140 ACCID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Address Remarks 0102 Delay Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor PS101 P022 1:paper 0202 Stationary Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor PS101 P022 1:paper 0A02 Power ON Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor...
  • Page 755 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes 7-141 ACCID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Address Remarks 0106 Delay Delivery Sensor PS12 P005 1:paper 0206 Stationary Delivery Sensor PS12 P005 1:paper 0A06 Power ON Delivery Sensor PS12 P005 1:paper...
  • Page 756 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes 7-142 ACCID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Address Remarks 0107 Delay Duplex Sensor PS01 P011 1:paper 0A07 Power ON Duplex Sensor PS01 P011 1:paper 0706 Fixing paper wrapping Fixing paper wrapping jam 0709 Fixing paper wrapping...
  • Page 757 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes 7-143 ACCID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Address Remarks 0A91 Power ON Multi-purpose Tray HP Sensor PS10 0A92 Power ON Multi-purpose Tray HP Sensor PS10 T-7-11 Multi-purpose Tray HP Sensor (PS10) PS10...
  • Page 758 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes 7-144 ACCID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Address Remarks 0B00 Door open 0B0D No drum jam 0CA1 Sequence Software sequence (Feed status cannot be returned) 0CA2 Sequence Software sequence (ImageReady cannot be sent) 0CA3...

  • Page 759: Detailed Jam Codes(Adf)

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes(ADF) 7-145 ■ Detailed Jam Codes(ADF) ACCID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Jam description Address Remarks 0001 Delay Document End PS02 Description When the Document End Sensor (PS02) does not detect the paper although a specified P001 1:paper Sensor...
  • Page 760 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes(ADF) 7-146 PS03 PS02 Document Sensor (PS03) Document End Sensor (PS02) F-7-12 7-146 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes(ADF)

  • Page 761: Detailed Jam Codes(Finisher)

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes(Finisher) 7-147 ■ Detailed Jam Codes(Finisher) ACCID Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Jam description Address Remarks Code 1001 Delay Buffer Sensor Description Detected when the Buffer Sensor (S1) does not detect paper after lapse of the specified time since reception of a paper delivery signal from the host machine.
  • Page 762 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes(Finisher) 7-148 Buffer Sensor (S1) Feed Path Sensor (S2) Staple HP Sensor (S11) F-7-13 7-148 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam Type > Detailed Jam Codes(Finisher)

  • Page 763: Alarm Code

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-149 Alarm Code Location Alarm Description Details Code Code 0002 Cassette 2 Lifter error Cause: Error in Lift Motor or Lifter Sensor Alarm Code Measures: 1. While Cassette 2 is removed, turn ON the power and then insert Cassette 2.
  • Page 764 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-150 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details Code Code Code Code 0003 Cassette 3 Lifter error Cause: Error in Lift Motor or Lifter Sensor 0004 Cassette 4 Lifter error Cause: Error in Lift Motor or Lifter Sensor Measures: Measures: 1.
  • Page 765 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-151 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details Code Code Code Code 0007 MP Tray Lifter error Cause: Error in Lift Motor or Lifter Sensor 0014 Cassette 4 paper feed retry Movement: Nothing in particular. Measures: error Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the...
  • Page 766 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-152 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details Code Code Code Code 0018 Toner (M) prior delivery An alarm for requesting a prior delivery is sent to 0021 Tried to apply abnormally Error in the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB, Error alarm UGW as the value of Toner level detect value has...
  • Page 767 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-153 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details Code Code Code Code 0024 Tried to apply abnormally Error in the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB, Error 0123 Current values at 2 points great primary transfer in the Primary Transfer Roller (ITB Unit) were not changed with...
  • Page 768 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-154 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details Code Code Code Code 000A For R&D 0080 Cassette 1 Feed Roller "Pushed was a replacement completion button of replacement completion Cassette 1 Feed Roller 0009 Right Door Fan alarm "Cause: Connector disconnection of the Right Door alarm...
  • Page 769 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-155 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details Code Code Code Code 0005 For R&D 0018 For R&D 0006 For R&D 0019 For R&D 0007 For R&D 0020 For R&D 1000 For R&D 0021 For R&D 2000 For R&D 0022 For R&D...
  • Page 770 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-156 Location Alarm Description Details Code Code 0016 For R&D 0018 For R&D 0019 For R&D 0001 Invalid data Since there is a high possibility that format of the data is not supported, collect the data if possible. 0002 For R&D 0003 For R&D 0004 For R&D...
  • Page 771 Service Mode ■ Overview ■ COPIER ■ FEEDER ■ SORTER ■ BOARD Service Mode...

  • Page 772: Entering Service Mode

    Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations Overview Service mode item explanations Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be Overview displayed. Select the desired initial window, main item, sub item or minor item, then pres [i] (Information Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself.

  • Page 773: I/O Information Enhancement

    Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description I/O information enhancement Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor, The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part.

  • Page 774: Copier> Option> Body, Item Segmentation

    Service Mode > Overview > COPIER> OPTION> BODY, Item Segmentation COPIER> OPTION> BODY, Item Segmentation ALARM CODE : COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-2 COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-3 On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER> OPTION> BODY (in related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item. In order to reach the intended item in shorter time, all items inside the BODY is classified to 15 categories.

  • Page 775: Security Features

    Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes Security features 1) Enter System Manager ID> enter System PIN> press OK button. (System Mangeger ID and System PIN can be set up in [Settings/Registration> To prevent unauthorized access to Service Mode, Password set is enabled. Management Settings>...

  • Page 776: Language Switch

    Service Mode > Overview > Language switch Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2) Language switch Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier. The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by When level 1 screen is displayed, press <LEVEL 1>...

  • Page 777: Back-Up Of Service Mode

    Service Mode > Overview > Service Label Back-up of service mode Service Label In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written The item of Service Label. in the service label. Item Factry Field1 Field2 Item Factry Field1 Field2 Item...

  • Page 778: The Data Output Of The Service Data Print

    Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device The data output of the service data print ■ How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device ●...
  • Page 779 Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device 2. Generating report file 6. Download ServicePrint. After the “ACTIVE” blinks for 3 to 4 minutes, generation of a report file is complete as “OK!” Press the control panel keys.

  • Page 780: How To Move Service Print Files To A Pc Using The Sst

    Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST 8-10 ■ How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST 4.
  • Page 781 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-11 COPIER COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION LANG-FR Display of French language file version Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file. DISPLAY Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) ■...
  • Page 782 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-12 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION LANG-FI Display of Finnish language file version LANG-SV Display of Swedish language file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file.
  • Page 783 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-13 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION FAX1 Display of 1-line FAX PCB ROM version COPY-ZH Dspl COPY appli Chinese file ver: smpl Lv.1 Details To display the ROM version of 1-line FAX PCB. Lv.2 Details To display the simplified Chinese language file version of COPY Nothing is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
  • Page 784 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-14 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPY-FI Dspl of COPY appli Finnish file version COPY-SL Dspl of COPY appli Slovenian file ver Lv.2 Details To display the Finnish language file version of COPY application Lv.2 Details To display the Slovenian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
  • Page 785 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-15 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPY-TK Dspl of COPY appli Turkish file version SEND-ES Dspl of SEND appli Spanish file version Lv.2 Details To display the Turkish language file version of COPY application Lv.1 Details To display the Spanish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
  • Page 786 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-16 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION SEND-ET Dspl of SEND appli Estonian file version SEND-RU Dspl of SEND appli Russian file version Lv.2 Details To display the Estonian language file version of SEND application Lv.2 Details To display the Russian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
  • Page 787 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-17 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION SEND-SK Dspl of SEND appli Slovak file version INTRO-DE Dspl of usful feat intro German file ver Lv.2 Details To display the Slovak language file version of SEND application (JAVA Lv.1 Details To display the version of German language file of Introduction to UI).
  • Page 788 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-18 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION INTRO-EL Dspl of useful feat intro Greek file ver INTRO-PT Dspl usful feat intro Portuguese filever Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file of Introduction to Useful Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file of Introduction to Features application.
  • Page 789 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-19 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION INTRO-RM Dspl useful feat intro Romanian file ver CSTMN-IT Dspl of custom menu Italian file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file of Introduction to Lv.1 Details To display the version of Italian language file for custom menu Useful Features application.
  • Page 790 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-20 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION CSTMN-DA Dspl of custom menu Danish file version CSTMN-PL Dspl of custom menu Polish file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Danish language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Polish language file for custom menu application.
  • Page 791 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-21 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION CSTMN-CR Dspl of custom menu Croatian file ver ACSBT-FR Dspl of accessibility French file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Croatian language file for custom menu Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file for Accessibility application.
  • Page 792 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-22 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION ACSBT-CS Dspl of accessibility Czech file version ACSBT-NO Dspl of accessibility Norwegian file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility application.
  • Page 793 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-23 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION ACSBT-BU Dspl of accessibility Bulgarian file ver ACSBT-VN Dspl accessibility Vietnamese file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Accessibility Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file for Accessibility application.
  • Page 794 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-24 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION ERS-KO Display of ERS Korean file version ERS-NL Display of ERS Dutch file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for ERS application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file for ERS application.
  • Page 795 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-25 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION ERS-ID Display of ERS Indonesian file ver ERS-TH Display of ERS Thai file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for ERS Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file for ERS application.
  • Page 796 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-26 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION LANG-VN Display of Vietnamese language file ver BOX-KO Display of BOX appli Korean file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
  • Page 797 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-27 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION BOX-NL Display of BOX appli Dutch file version BOX-ID Display of BOX appli Indonesian file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for BOX (JAVA UI).
  • Page 798 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-28 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION BOX-TH Dspl of BOX appli Thai file version SC-TW Dspl of SC appli Chinese file ver:trad Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file for BOX application (JAVA Lv.2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for Self UI).
  • Page 799 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-29 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION SC-HU Dspl of SC appli Hungarian file version SC-SV Dspl of SC appli Swedish file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file for Self Copy Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file for Self Copy application (JAVA UI).
  • Page 800 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-30 COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION SC-CA Dspl of SC appli Catalan file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file for Self Copy application (JAVA UI). Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99...
  • Page 801 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS 8-31 ■ USER ■ ACC-STS COPIER> DISPLAY>USER COPIER> DISPLAY> ACC-STS SPDTYPE Display of engine speed type FEEDER Display of DADF connection state Lv.1 Details To display the engine speed type of this machine. Lv.1 Details To display the connecting state of DADF.
  • Page 802 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG 8-32 ■ ANALOG COPIER> DISPLAY> ACC-STS MN-RAM Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG Lv.1 Details To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB. TEMP Display of outside temperature Use case When checking the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB Lv.1 Details...
  • Page 803 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS 8-33 ■ HV-STS COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG TEMP2 Display of inside temperature COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS Lv.1 Details To display the estimated temperature inside the machine that is 1ATVC-Y Dspl of primary transfer current (Y) calculated from the outside temperature and elapsed time.
  • Page 804 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD 8-34 ■ CCD COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS 1ATVC-K4 Dspl prmry trns current(Bk):full clr mod COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD Lv.2 Details To display the decuple value of the current flown to the Primary TARGET-B Shading target value (B) Transfer Roller (Bk) by the primary transfer ATVC control in full color Lv.2 Details To display the shading target value of Blue.
  • Page 805 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT 8-35 ■ DPOT COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT 1TR-DC-K Dspl of primary transfer voltage (Bk) COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT Lv.2 Details To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller 2TR-PPR Dspl of sec trns ATVC ppr allotted voltg (Bk).
  • Page 806 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS 8-36 ■ DENS COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT LPWR-K Display of laser power (Bk) COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS Lv.2 Details To display Bk laser power determined by potential control. DENS-Y Display of Y developer density TD ratio FF display with low image density is considered that the Lv.1 Details To display TD ratio of Y-color developer density in % (percentage).
  • Page 807 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS 8-37 COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS DENS-S-M Dspl differ from M patch density tgt VL REF-Y Dspl of Y developer density target value Lv.2 Details To display difference between the M-color target patch density at Lv.2 Details To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (Y).
  • Page 808 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS 8-38 COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS DEV-DC-C Dspl of developing DC voltage (C) CHG-DC-K Dspl Pry charge DC voltg (Bk)& gain VL Lv.2 Details To display the latest C developing DC voltage Vdc. Lv.2 Details To display the latest output value of primary charging DC voltage (Bk).
  • Page 809 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS 8-39 COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS P-B-P-C ITB frt base intensity (Pwave):ATR ctrl CONT-M Dspl ATR Sensor (M) control voltage Lv.2 Details To display the ITB background light intensity (P-wave) detected by Lv.2 Details To display the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (M).
  • Page 810 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC 8-40 ■ MISC COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS D-M-LVL Display of ATR patch form level (M) COPIER> DISPLAY> MISC Lv.2 Details To display the ATR patch form level of M-color. LPOWER-Y Display of laser power (Y) Use case When judging whether there is an error in the ATR patch form level Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 811 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-41 ■ HT-C COPIER> DISPLAY> MISC TNRB-IDC Display of C-color Toner Container ID COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C Lv.1 Details To display the ID of C-color Toner Container that is installed to the TGT-A-Y Dspl ARCDAT screen A Y-color target VL machine Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 812 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-42 COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C TGT-B-Y Dspl ARCDAT screen B Y-color target VL TGT-C-M Dspl ARCDAT screen C M-color target VL Lv.2 Details To display the Y-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control. Lv.2 Details To display the M-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
  • Page 813 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-43 COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C SUM-A-C Dspl ARCDAT screen A C-color ctrl differ SUM-B-K Dspl ARCDAT screen B Bk-clr ctrl differ Lv.2 Details To display C-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control. Lv.2 Details To display Bk-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the...
  • Page 814 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-44 COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C SGNL-A-Y Dspl ARCDAT screen A Y-patch current VL SGNL-B-C Dspl ARCDAT screen B C-patch current VL Lv.2 Details To display the current Y-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control. Lv.2 Details To display the current C-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
  • Page 815 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-45 COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C DLTA-A-Y Dspl of ARCDAT screen A Y-density differ DLTA-B-Y Dspl of ARCDAT screen B Y-density differ Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
  • Page 816 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-46 COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C DLTA-C-Y Dspl of ARCDAT screen C Y-density differ TGT-B-C2 [Not used] Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the TGT-B-K2 [Not used] current value of screen C in ARCDAT control.

  • Page 817: Main Body_Dc Controller (Dc-Con> P001 To P)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC Controller (DC-CON> P001 to P026) 8-47 Address Name Symbol Remarks P006 Not used ■ Main Body_DC Controller (DC-CON> P001 to P026) Not used Not used Main Body Not used Not used Cassette Feeding Unit-AG1 / Cassette Feeding Unit-AH1 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor 0:paper...
  • Page 818 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC Controller (DC-CON> P001 to P026) 8-48 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P008 Not used P011 Not used Not used Not used Not used ITB Pressure Release Switch 1:closes/0:open Not used Duplex Sensor 1:paper...
  • Page 819 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC Controller (DC-CON> P001 to P026) 8-49 Address Name Symbol Remarks Address Name Symbol Remarks P021 Not used P023 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Duplex Solenoid SL02 1:ON / 0:OFF Not used Registration Shutter Solenoid...
  • Page 820 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Reader (R-CON> P001) 8-50 ■ Reader (R-CON> P001) Address Name Symbol Remarks P026 Not used Address Name Symbol Remarks Not used P001 Not used Not used Not used Cassette 2 Lifter Motor M104 1:ON Not used Not used...

  • Page 821: Adf (R-Con> P)

    Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > ADF (R-CON> P001) 8-51 ■ ADF (R-CON> P001) Address Name Symbol Remarks P001 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 1:paper 1:paper T-8-15 8-51 Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > ADF (R-CON> P001)
  • Page 822 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY 8-52 ADJUST COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY ADJ-S Adj image read start position: horz scan ■ ADJ-XY Lv.1 Details To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction when black line/white line occurs. COPIER>...
  • Page 823 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-53 ■ CCD COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY STRD-POS Adj read pstn in DADF mode: front side COPIER> ADJUST> CCD Lv.1 Details To adjust the reading position at DADF reading (front side). W-PLT-X White level data(X) entry of White Plate When replacing the Scanner Unit or Main Controller PCB/clearing Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-...
  • Page 824 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-54 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD 50-RG RG clr displace crrct: 300dpi book mode 100-RG RG clr displace crrct: 600dpi book mode Lv.1 Details To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper front) occurs at copyboard...
  • Page 825 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-55 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD 50DF-RG RG clr displace crrct: 300dpi DADF mode 100DF-RG RG clr displace crrct: 600dpi DADF mode Lv.1 Details To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper front) occurs at DADF...
  • Page 826 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-56 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD DFTAR-R Shading tgt VL(R) [1st reading position] DFTAR2-R Shading tgt VL(R) [2nd reading position] Lv.1 Details When clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value of Lv.1 Details When clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value of P-PRINT.
  • Page 827 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-57 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD MTF2-M1 MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Cpybrd] MTF2-M4 MTF value 4 setting: horz scan [Cpybrd] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 828 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-58 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD MTF2-M7 MTF value 7 setting: horz scan [Cpybrd] MTF2-S1 MTF value 1 setting: vert scan [Cpybrd] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 829 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-59 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD MTF2-S4 MTF value 4 setting: vert scan [Cpybrd] MTF2-S7 MTF value 7 setting: vert scan [Cpybrd] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 830 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-60 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD MTF-M1 MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [DADF] MTF-M4 MTF value 4 setting: horz scan [DADF] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 831 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-61 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD MTF-M7 MTF value 7 setting: horz scan [DADF] MTF-S1 MTF value 1 setting: vert scan [DADF] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 832 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-62 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD MTF-S4 MTF value 4 setting: vert scan [DADF] MTF-S7 MTF value 7 setting: vert scan [DADF] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 833 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-63 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD DFTAR3-R Shading tgt VL (R): DADF [3rd read pstn] OFST-CL0 Adj CIS-ch0 offset: color mode, 300 dpi Lv.1 Details When clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value of Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset (black level) of the Scanner Unit on channel 0 in P-PRINT.
  • Page 834 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-64 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD OFST-CL4 Adj CIS-ch4 offset: color mode, 300 dpi OFST2CL2 Adj CIS-ch2 offset: color mode, 600 dpi Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset (black level) of the Scanner Unit on channel 4 in Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset (black level) of the Scanner Unit on channel 2 in color mode with 300 dpi.
  • Page 835 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-65 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD GAIN-CL0 Adj CIS gain level: color mode, 300 dpi LED-CL-B Adj LEDSTOP VL (B): color mode, 300 dpi Lv.1 Details To adjust the gain (amplification of detection level) of the Scanner Lv.1 Details To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED which is a primary Unit in color mode with 300 dpi.
  • Page 836 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-66 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD COPIER> ADJUST> CCD LED-CLR2 Adj sec lgt src LEDSTOP VL(R):clr,300dpi LED-CLB2 Adj sec lgt src LEDSTOP VL(B):clr,300dpi Lv.1 Details To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED which is a secondary Lv.1 Details To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED which is a secondary light source of the Scanner Unit in color mode with 300 dpi.
  • Page 837 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG 8-67 ■ IMG-REG COPIER> ADJUST> CCD LED2CLG2 Adj sec lgt src LEDSTOP VL(G):clr,600dpi COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG Lv.1 Details To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED which is a REG-H-Y Adj Y-color write start pstn: horz scan secondary light source of the Scanner Unit in color mode with 600 Lv.1 Details...
  • Page 838 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG 8-68 COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG REG-HS-C Adj C-color write start pstn: horz scan REG-V-K Adj Bk-color write start pstn: vert scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the write start position of cyan color image in the horizontal Lv.1 Details To adjust the write start position of black color image in the vertical scanning direction in smaller increments than 1 pixel.
  • Page 839 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG 8-69 COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG BEND-Y Y-color laser distortion crrct:vert scan LSR-V-M1 Adj M wrt start pstn:vert scan, 1st sht Lv.1 Details To correct distortion of Y-color laser in vertical scanning direction. Lv.2 Details To adjust the write start position of M-color image in vertical scanning (Digital registration)
  • Page 840 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG 8-70 COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG LSR-V-K1 Adj Bk wrt start pstn:vert scan, 1st sht SLOP-Y Adjustment of image squareness Lv.2 Details To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in vertical Lv.2 Details To adjust skew of image (squareness) in vertical scanning direction scanning direction when color displacement occurs only with the...
  • Page 841 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS 8-71 ■ DENS COPIER> ADJUST> DENS HLMT-PTC Adj ATR Sensor (C) dens crrct upr limit COPIER> ADJUST> DENS Lv.2 Details To adjust the upper limit of the target density correction (lower limit of HLMT-PTY Adj ATR Sensor (Y) dens crrct upr limit TD ratio) of the ATR Sensor (C).
  • Page 842 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS 8-72 COPIER> ADJUST> DENS COPIER> ADJUST> DENS LLMT-PTM Adj ATR Sensor (M)dens crrct lowr limit T-SPLY-M Adjustment of M toner supply amount Lv.2 Details To adjust the lower limit of the target density correction (upper limit of Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset value of M toner supply amount.
  • Page 843 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS 8-73 COPIER> ADJUST> DENS COPIER> ADJUST> DENS DMAX-M Adj D-max ctrl M-color dens target VL P-TG-M Adj of ATR control M-color target value Lv.2 Details An image failure might occur because the density target value of the Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for M.
  • Page 844 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS 8-74 COPIER> ADJUST> DENS COPIER> ADJUST> DENS P-TG-K Adj of ATR control Bk-color target value LLMT-PTK Adj ATR Sensor (Bk) dens crrct low limit Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for Bk. Lv.2 Details To adjust the lower limit of the target density correction (upper limit of When the target value determined upon initialization is changed,...
  • Page 845 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT 8-75 ■ BLANK ■ V-CONT COPIER> ADJUST> BLANK COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT BLANK-T Adjustment of leading edge margin VCONT-Y Adj of Y-color contrast potential Lv.1 Details To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper. Lv.2 Details To adjust the contrast potential for Y.
  • Page 846 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT 8-76 COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT VCONT-M Adj of M-color contrast potential VCONT-C Adj of C-color contrast potential Lv.2 Details To adjust the contrast potential for M. Lv.2 Details To adjust the contrast potential for C. As the value is incremented by 1, the contrast potential changes by As the value is incremented by 1, the contrast potential changes by 10V.
  • Page 847 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT 8-77 COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT VCONT-K Adj of Bk-color contrast potential VBACK-Y Adj Y-clr fog remov potntl:pln/rcycl 1,2 Lv.2 Details To adjust the contrast potential for Bk. Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Y-color As the value is incremented by 1, the contrast potential changes by when printing plain paper 1, 2/recycled paper 1, 2 (which paper width 10V.
  • Page 848 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT 8-78 COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT VBACK-C Adj C-clr fog remov potntl:pln/rcycl 1,2 VBACK2-Y Adj Y fog remov potntl: pln/rcycl 3, etc Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C-color Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Y-color when printing plain paper 1, 2/recycled paper 1, 2 (which paper width...
  • Page 849 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT 8-79 COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT VBACK2-C Adj C fog remov potntl: pln/rcycl 3, etc VBACK3-Y Adj Y fog remov potntl:excpt pln, rcycl Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C-color Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Y-color when printing plain paper 1, 2/recycled paper 1, 2 (which paper width...
  • Page 850 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL 8-80 ■ PASCAL COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT VBACK3-C Adj C fog remov potntl:excpt pln, rcycl COPIER> ADJUST> PASCAL Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C-color OFST-P-Y Y density adj at test print reading when printing paper other than plain paper 1, 2, 3/recycled paper 1, 2, Lv.1 Details...
  • Page 851 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR 8-81 ■ COLOR COPIER> ADJUST> PASCAL OFST-P-K Bk density adj at test print reading COPIER> ADJUST> COLOR Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto ADJ-Y Y-color balance adjustment gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
  • Page 852 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR 8-82 COPIER> ADJUST> COLOR COPIER> ADJUST> COLOR ADJ-K Bk-color balance adjustment OFST-M Adj of M bright area dens&color balance Lv.1 Details To adjust the default value of the color balance for Bk when the Lv.1 Details To adjust the bright area density and color balance of M.
  • Page 853 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR 8-83 COPIER> ADJUST> COLOR COPIER> ADJUST> COLOR OFST-K Adj Bk bright area dens&color balance LD-OFS-C Color balance adj of C low dens area Lv.1 Details To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Bk. Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C.
  • Page 854 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR 8-84 COPIER> ADJUST> COLOR COPIER> ADJUST> COLOR MD-OFS-M Color balance adj of M mid dens area HD-OFS-Y Color balance adj of Y high dens area Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the intermediate density area of M. Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y.
  • Page 855 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR 8-85 COPIER> ADJUST> COLOR COPIER> ADJUST> COLOR HD-OFS-K Color balance adj of Bk high dens area PL-OFS-K Clr blnce adj of Bk low dens area:PDL Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk. Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk at PDL print.
  • Page 856 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR 8-86 COPIER> ADJUST> COLOR COPIER> ADJUST> COLOR PM-OFS-K Clr blnce adj of Bk mid dens area:PDL PH-OFS-K Clr blnce adj of Bk high dens area:PDL Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the intermediate density area of Bk at Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk at PDL PDL print.
  • Page 857 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-87 ■ HV-TR COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR 1TR-TGK1 Bk-m pry trn ATVC tgt crrnt:pln/rcycl1,2 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for single Bk-color 1TR-TGY Y pry trn ATVC tgt crrnt:pln/rcycl1,2 upon primary transfer ATVC control for plain paper 1, 2/recycled Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for Y-color upon...
  • Page 858 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-88 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR 1TR-TGY2 Adj Y pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: other ppr 1TR-TGC2 Adj C pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: other ppr Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for Y-color upon Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for C-color upon primary transfer ATVC control for other types of papers.
  • Page 859 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-89 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR 1TR-TGY3 Adj Y pry trn ATVC tgt crrnt:pln/rcycl 3 1TR-TGC3 Adj C pry trn ATVC tgt crrnt:pln/rcycl 3 Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for Y-color upon Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for C-color upon primary transfer ATVC control for plain paper 1, 2/recycled paper 1,...
  • Page 860 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-90 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR 1TR-TK42 Bk-c pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: other ppr 2TR-N1-1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V: pln1 1st Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current value for Bk-color (in full Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 1st side of plain color mode) upon primary transfer ATVC control for other types of...
  • Page 861 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-91 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR 2TR-N2-2 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V: pln2 2nd 2TR-R1-1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V:rcycl1 1st Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 2nd side of plain Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 1st side of recycled paper 2 at secondary transfer ATVC control.
  • Page 862 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-92 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR 2TR-R2-2 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V:rcycl2 2nd 2TR-H1-1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V: hvy1 1st Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 2nd side of Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 1st side of heavy recycled paper 2 at secondary transfer ATVC control.
  • Page 863 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-93 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR 2TR-H2-2 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V: hvy2 2nd 2TR-CP-1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V: color 1st Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 2nd side of heavy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 1st side of color paper 2 at secondary transfer ATVC control.
  • Page 864 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-94 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR 2TR-LA-1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V: label 1st 2TR-NC-2 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allotV:no-crbn 2nd Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 1st side of label Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 2nd side of non- paper at secondary transfer ATVC control.
  • Page 865 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-95 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR 2TR-PA-1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V: punch 1st 2TR-EN-2 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V: envlp 2nd Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 1st side of pre- Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 2nd side of punched paper at secondary transfer ATVC control.
  • Page 866 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-96 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR T2TR-N1 Adj of lead edge weak bias: pln ppr 1 T2TR-R1 Adj of lead edge weak bias: rcycl ppr 1 Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the leading edge weak bias for plain paper 1. Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the leading edge weak bias for recycled paper Decrease the value if white spots occur.
  • Page 867 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-97 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR T2TR-H1 Adj of lead edge weak bias: heavy ppr 1 T2TR-P Adj of leading edge weak bias: postcard Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the leading edge weak bias for heavy paper 1. Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the leading edge weak bias for postcard.
  • Page 868 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-98 ■ FEED-ADJ COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR 2TR-TH-2 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V: thin 2nd COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 2nd side of thin REGIST Registration start timing adj: 1/1 speed paper at secondary transfer ATVC control.
  • Page 869 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-99 COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ ADJ-C3 Cassette 3 write start pstn in horz scan ADJ-C1RE Write start pstn in horz scan:Cst1 2nd Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 3.
  • Page 870 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-100 COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ ADJ-C4RE Write start pstn in horz scan:Cst4 2nd REG-DUP1 Rgst start timing adj: Plain, 2nd side Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning Lv.1 Details To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the direction for 2nd side when feeding paper from the Cassette 4.
  • Page 871 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-101 COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ REG-SPD Speed adjustment of Registration Motor REG-MF Adj lead edg margin: plain,rcycl,thn,MP Lv.1 Details To adjust the 1/1 speed of the Registration Motor. Lv.1 Details To adjust the leading edge margin by changing the timing to turn As the value is incremented by 1, the speed is increased by 0.2%.
  • Page 872 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-102 COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ REG-MFH2 Adj ppr lead edge margin: heavy 3, MP REG-MENV Adj ppr lead edge margin: envelope, MP Lv.1 Details To adjust the leading edge margin by changing the timing to turn ON Lv.1 Details To adjust the leading edge margin by changing the timing to turn the Registration Motor when feeding heavy paper 3 from the Multi-...
  • Page 873 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ 8-103 ■ CST-ADJ COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ REG-MFPC Adj ppr lead edge margin: postcard, MP COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ Lv.1 Details To adjust the leading edge margin by changing the timing to turn ON CST-VLM1 Adj Cassette 1 level detect threshold VL the Registration Motor when feeding postcard from the Multi-purpose...
  • Page 874 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ 8-104 COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ CST-VLM2 Adj Cassette 2 l CST-VLM3 Adj Cassette 3 level detect threshold VL evel detect threshold VL Lv.2 Details To adjust the timing to switch the scale indicating paper level in the Lv.2 Details To adjust the timing to switch the scale indicating paper level in the Cassette 3 from “3”...
  • Page 875 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC 8-105 ■ MISC COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ CST-VLM4 Adj Cassette 4 level detect threshold VL COPIER> ADJUST> MISC Lv.2 Details To adjust the timing to switch the scale indicating paper level in the SEG-ADJ Set criteria for text/photo: front side Cassette 4 from “3”...
  • Page 876 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC 8-106 COPIER> ADJUST> MISC COPIER> ADJUST> MISC ACS-CNT Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:front SH-ADJ Adjustment of sharpness Lv.2 Details To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in Lv.1 Details To adjust the sharpness of the images which are set in Settings/ ACS mode.
  • Page 877 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-107 FUNCTION COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL E-RDS Set use/no use of Embedded-RDS function ■ INSTALL Lv.1 Details To set whether to use the Embedded-RDS function. Use case When using Embedded-RDS COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
  • Page 878 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-108 COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL COM-LOG Dspl connect error w/ Sales Co’s server CNT-INTV Set counter send interval to SC server Lv.1 Details To display error information when the connection with the sales Lv.1 Details To set the interval of sending counter information to the sales company’s server failed.
  • Page 879 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD 8-109 ■ CCD COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL HD-CRYP Exe HDD Encrypt Board ini install mod COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD Lv.1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of DF-WLVL1 White level adj in book mode: color the HDD Encryption Board.
  • Page 880 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL 8-110 ■ CLEANING ■ PANEL COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL TBLT-CLN Toner ejection and ITB cleaning LCD-CHK Check of LCD Panel dot missing Lv.1 Details To form a halftone band on the ITB and execute ITB cleaning. Lv.1 Details To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Deteriorated toner can be ejected, and soiling on the ITB can be...
  • Page 881 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK 8-111 ■ PART-CHK COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK Specification of operation Motor COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK Lv.1 Details To specify the Motor to operate. Specification of operation Clutch Use case When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Lv.1 Details To specify the Clutch to operate.
  • Page 882 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-112 ■ CLEAR COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR ADRS-BK Clear of address book COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR Lv.1 Details To clear the address book data. Clear of error code Use case When clearing the address book data Lv.1 Details To clear error codes (E000, E001, E002, E003, E717, E719).
  • Page 883 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-113 COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR MN-CON RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board CA-KEY Init of key pair, certificate and CRL Lv.1 Details To clear the area equivalent to the Main Controller PCB SRAM Lv.2 Details To simultaneously delete the key pair, certificate and CRL which are Board.
  • Page 884 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-114 COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR KEY-CLR Encrypt key clear of HDD Encrypt Board FXTX-CLR Clearing fax job information Lv.2 Details To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board (Security Lv.1 Details To clear fax job information stored on SRAM.
  • Page 885 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 8-115 ■ MISC-R MISC-P COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P SCANLAMP Light-up check of Scanning Lamp/LED P-PRINT Output of service mode setting value Lv.1 Details To light up the Scanning Lamp/LED for 3 seconds. Lv.1 Details To print the service mode setting value.
  • Page 886 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 8-116 COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P 1ATVC-EX Execute of primary transfer ATVC control USBH-PRT Output of USB device information report Lv.1 Details To execute the primary transfer ATVC control. Lv.1 Details To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a report.
  • Page 887 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM 8-117 ■ SYSTEM COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P FX-RG-H Exe of ppr side rgst displace check mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM Lv.2 Details To execute the mode to check side registration displacement of DOWNLOAD Shift to download mode paper based on the position at the Fixing Assembly.
  • Page 888 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM 8-118 COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM HD-CHECK HDD file system check RSRAMBUP Backup of Reader-related setting data Lv.1 Details To execute the HDD file system check at the next startup. Lv.2 Details To back up the Reader-related setting data in RAM of the Main Controller PCB.
  • Page 889 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG 8-119 ■ DBG-LOG COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG LOG-TRIG Set of debug log storage condition COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG Lv.2 Details To set the conditions (timing, types, etc.) to automatically store the LOG2USB Storage of debug log to USB memory debug logs (stored as an archive file).
  • Page 890 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG 8-120 COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG HIT-STS2 Display of debug log state w/ string Lv.2 Details To display whether archive file of the debug log including character strings specified in LOG-TRIG exists or not. Use case When checking the debug log automatically stored Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
  • Page 891 It differs according to the location. YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese) Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW > MODELSZ2, KSIZE-SW, FEED- ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON) AA: Paper size configuration (00: AB configuration, 01: Inch DH-SW ON/OFF of auto D-half control configuration, 02: A configuration, 03: Inch/AB configuration) Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 892 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-122 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW INTROT-1 Set ATR ctrl patch density dtct interval DMAX-SW Setting of D-max control timing Lv.1 Details To set execution interval of patch density detection executed at ATR Lv.2 Details To set the D-max control execution timing.
  • Page 893 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-123 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW FXWRNLVL Set Fix Film life display threshold VL SJB-UNW Reserve upper limit of secure print job Lv.2 Details To set the threshold value to display the life of Fixing Film. Lv.2 Details To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secure print This item is enabled when the value at the following is set to “1”...
  • Page 894 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-124 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW MIBCOUNT Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB RPT2SIDE Set of report 1-sided/2-sided output Lv.2 Details To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB Lv.1 Details To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service (Management Information Base).
  • Page 895 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-125 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW CDS-FIRM Set to allow firmware update by admin MC-FANSW Setting of Controller Fan control Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit update of the firmware by user Lv.1 Details To set full speed/half speed to fan control of the Controller Fan 1 and (administrator).
  • Page 896 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-126 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW FAX-INT Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode CDS-LVUP Set to allow CDS periodical update Lv.2 Details To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception Lv.1 Details To set whether to allow the user (administrator)/service technician to print automatically.
  • Page 897 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-127 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW DMAX-DAY Set D-max control execution frequency SVC-RUI Enabling of RUI function for servicing Lv.1 Details To set the frequency of D-max control that is executed after a Lv.1 Details To set whether to enable the RUI function for servicing (not provided specified number of sheets is fed.
  • Page 898 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-128 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW T-DLV-BK Set Bk pre-toner low alarm notice timing D-DLV-CL Set YMC Drum auto dvry alarm notice tmg Lv.1 Details To set the timing to notify the pre-toner low alarm for Bk-color (toner Lv.1 Details To set the timing to notify the auto delivery alarm for the Drum Unit (Y/ level).
  • Page 899 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-129 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW ASLPMAX Set auto sleep shift time maximum value R-DR-FAN Adj Right Door Unit Fan airflow amount Lv.1 Details Set auto sleep shift time maximum value. Lv.2 Details To set the rotation speed of the Right Door Unit Fan during printing.
  • Page 900 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-130 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW CRG-FANR Adj Drum-U Exhst Fan airflow amnt: print STP-TMP Temp rise prev mod stop seq temp thrshld Lv.2 Details To set the rotation speed of the Drum Unit Exhaust Fan during Lv.2 Details To set the threshold value of the temperature of the Developing printing.
  • Page 901 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-131 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW WT-FL-LM No. of fed sht after wst tonr full dtct T1CL-UP Set of mod shift tmg at clr/black switch Lv.2 Details Since the Waste Toner Full Sensor detects toner full optically, timing Lv.2 Details To set the timing to shift from color mode to black mode when to display the waste toner near full notice may vary depending on the...
  • Page 902 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-132 ■ DSPLY-SW COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW T-LW-LVL Dspl timing of toner level warning mssg COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW Lv.2 Details To set the threshold value of residual toner in the toner bottle. UI-COPY Display/hide of copy screen When the residual toner level becomes lower than the threshold, a Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 903 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-133 COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW UI-PRINT Display/hide of secured print screen HPFL-DSP ON/OFF pln 3, rcycl 3, hvy 1/2/3 mode Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the secured print screen. Lv.1 Details To set whether to display the modes for plain paper 3, recycled paper 3, heavy paper 1/2/3 on the Auto Adjust Gradation screen at the time...
  • Page 904 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-134 COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW UI-NAVI Display/hide of Tutorial CLN-SEL Set of condensation prev main unit clean Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide “Introduction to Useful Features” in Lv.1 Details To set the effect of cleaning inside the main unit for condensation the main menu.
  • Page 905 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-135 ■ IMG-FIX COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW WT-WARN Dspl/hide of Wst Tonr Cntner prep mssg COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX Lv.1 Details To set whether to display the preparation warning message of the NEGA-GST ON/OFF of pre-exposure operation Waste Toner Container on the status area of LUI.
  • Page 906 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-136 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX TMP-TBL2 Fixing control temperature:Heavy paper 1 TMP-TBL4 Fixing control temperature:Heavy paper 3 Lv.1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for heavy paper 1 (106 Lv.1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for heavy paper 3 (164 to 128 g/m2).
  • Page 907 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-137 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX TMP-TBL6 Fixing control temperature: Envelope FXS-TMP3 Image leading edge control temp: heavy 2 Lv.1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for envelope. Lv.1 Details To set the offset of image leading edge control temperature for heavy As the value is incremented by 1, the control temperature is...
  • Page 908 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-138 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX FXS-TMP5 Image leading edge control temp: thin FXST2-N2 Set of ITOP wait time:Plain ppr in LL Ev Lv.1 Details To set the offset of image leading edge control temperature for thin Lv.1 Details To set initial rotation time when plain paper 1/2/3 is fed with a paper (60 to 63 g/m2).
  • Page 909 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-139 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX TMP-TBL7 Fixing control temperature:Plain paper 2 FXS-TMP7 Image leading edge control temp: pln 2 Lv.1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 2 (76 to Lv.1 Details To set the offset of image leading edge control temperature for plain 90 g/m2).
  • Page 910 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-140 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX FIXMIXBD Setting of media mixed mode TMP-TB13 Fixing control temperature: Rcycl ppr 2 Lv.1 Details To set whether image quality or productivity to be prioritized when Lv.1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for recycled paper 2 (76 media are mixed.
  • Page 911 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX 8-141 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX FXS-TM11 Image leading edge control temp: rcycl 1 FXS-TM13 Image leading edge control temp: rcycl 2 Lv.1 Details To set the offset of image leading edge control temperature for Lv.1 Details To set the offset of image leading edge control temperature for recycled paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2).
  • Page 912 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR 8-142 ■ IMG-TR COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX TMP-TB17 Fixing control temperature: Rcycl ppr 3 COPIER > OPTION> IMG-TR Lv.1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for recycled paper 3 (91 2TR-RVON Setting of trailing edge weak bias to 105 g/m2).
  • Page 913 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV 8-143 ■ IMG-DEV COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV DMX-OF-Y Adj of Y-color D-max target density COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV Lv.2 Details To adjust the target density of D-max control in case that density of AUTO-DH ON/OFF of proc auto adj at warm-up rotn solid area on Y-color image is not appropriate even performing auto Lv.1 Details...
  • Page 914 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV 8-144 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV DMX-OF-C Adj of C-color D-max target density ADJ-VPPN Adj of dev AC bias Vpp: plain/rcycl3,etc Lv.2 Details To adjust the target density of D-max control in case that density of Lv.2 Details To adjust the Vpp of the developing AC bias when printing plain solid area on C-color image is not appropriate even performing auto...
  • Page 915 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV 8-145 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV DEVL-THC Set toner ejectn img duty threshold (C) TNNEWCNT Set of new Toner Container check times Lv.2 Details To set the threshold value for average image ratio where C-toner Lv.2 Details To set the number of times to execute the new Toner Container ejection is executed.
  • Page 916 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR 8-146 ■ IMG-RDR COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV ADJ-VPP3 Adj of developing AC bias Vpp: other ppr COPIER> OPTION> IMG-RDR Lv.2 Details To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias at the time of printing with DFDST-L1 DADF mode dust dtct level adj: ppr intvl other types of papers.
  • Page 917 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON 8-147 ■ IMG-MCON COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON PRN-FLG Select of image area flag (PDL image) COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON Lv.2 Details To set the image area flag for the image processing which is PASCAL Use/no use of auto gradation adj data performed when a PDL image fails to be compressed at a specified Lv.1 Details...
  • Page 918 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON 8-148 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON TNR-DWN Setting of toner deposit amount REDU-CNT Set toner deposit amount limt at clr adj Lv.2 Details To set the toner deposit amount on the gradation area and text area. Lv.2 Details To set whether to limit the toner deposit amount at color adjustment By reducing the toner deposit amount when toner scatters or paper...
  • Page 919 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2: Hammermill Laser Print [International Paper] (For USA) 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3: Canon Office 80 [Mondi Business Paper] (For EU) 3) Execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). Default value...
  • Page 920 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD 8-150 ■ IMG-SPD COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON BGE-OFS Fine adj of background adjustment level COPIER> OPTION> IMG-SPD Lv.2 Details To make a fine adjustment of the background adjustment (background FX-D-TMP Set small ppr down sequence start temp removal) level which can be set manually.
  • Page 921 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING 8-151 ■ CLEANING COPIER> OPTION> IMG-SPD ARC-INT1 Set of ARCDAT interruption interval COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING Lv.2 Details To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT OHP-PTH Set of ITB clean transp threshold value control is executed.
  • Page 922 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING 8-152 COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING DR-CL-L Set toner band length: Drum Clean Blade ITB-CL-T Set toner band form intvl: ITB Cln Blade Lv.2 Details To set the length of toner band for preventing flipping of the Drum Lv.2 Details To set the interval to form toner band for preventing flipping of the Cleaning Blade.
  • Page 923 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW 8-153 ■ ENV-SET ■ FEED-SW COPIER> OPTION> ENV-SET COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW ENVP-INT Temp, humid &Fix Film temp log get cycle EVLP-SPD Envelope feeding speed setting Lv.1 Details To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside Lv.1 Details To set the envelope feeding speed.

  • Page 924: Network

    Display/adj/set range 0 to 999 communication with the built-in application (UI) and the internal 0: E-mail text not printed, 999: Unlimited application such as COPY/ SEND/ BOX, etc. (Canon’s own protocol). Default value CMD-PORT ON/OFF TOTasync command comctn port SMTPTXPN Setting of SMTP TX port number Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 925 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-155 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK NS-GSAPI Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth NS-PLN Limit PLAIN auth at SMTP auth noencry Lv.2 Details To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP Lv.2 Details To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plain text, at authentication.
  • Page 926 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-156 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK CHNG-STS Set of TOT status connection port number WUEV-INT Setting of sleep notification interval Lv.2 Details To set the port number for status connection with T.O.T. Lv.2 Details To set the interval of sleep notification.
  • Page 927 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-157 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK IFX-CHIG Set operation by IFAX recv e-mail text PROXYRES Setting of proxy response to Windows Lv.1 Details To set the number of characters for the IFAX received mail content, Lv.2 Details To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status so that the mail is not printed/forwarded when the characters in the...
  • Page 928 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-158 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK SPDALDEL Initialization of SPD value SP-LINK Mode setting at 1W sleep Lv.2 Details To initialize all the SPD values that are under management. Lv.1 Details To set the condition to shit to sleep mode SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM.
  • Page 929 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-159 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK ILOGKEEP Set of IP address block log hold time IPMTU Setting of MTU size of network packet Lv.1 Details To set the retention time from the log time of IP block. Lv.1 Details To change MTU size of network packet.
  • Page 930 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-160 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK PRCLTYPE Setting of dedicated protocol type VLAN-PKT No. of VLAN participation packet to send Lv.2 Details To set the type of dedicated protocol (CPCA protocol). Lv.2 Details To set the number of packets for participating in VLAN.
  • Page 931 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM 8-161 ■ CUSTOM COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK SSLSTRNG Allow weak encryption algorithm for SSL COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM Lv.2 Details To set whether to allow using weak encryption algorithm for SSL. TEMP-TBL Fixing control temperature:Plain paper 1 When 1 is set, weak encryption algorithm cannot be used.
  • Page 932 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM 8-162 COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM FAN-POST Dup Cool Fan oprtn time:aftr 1-sided fd RDEV-SP5 RCON device special settings 5 Lv.2 Details To set the operation time of the Duplex Cooling Fan after performing Lv.2 Details To execute the device special setting.
  • Page 933 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-163 ■ USER COPIER> OPTION> USER COUNTER3 Setting of software counter 3 COPIER> OPTION> USER Lv.1 Details To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check COPY-LIM Setting of upper limit for copy screen.
  • Page 934 Default value Collate mode, as bind figure while the value of COPIES command for the next page or later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon- made PCL at the time of Non Sorted mode) 2 to 65535: For future use...
  • Page 935 - Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the 0: No transmission, 1: Transmission Quality Support Division. Default value Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Supplement/memo Charge management device: Coin Manager, Non-Canon-made 0: Hide, 1: Display control card Default value DFLT-CPY Setting of color mode for copy Supplement/memo Individual count-up (counter advance) of MEAP application is Lv.1 Details...
  • Page 936 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-166 COPIER> OPTION> USER COPIER> OPTION> USER IFAX-SZL Setting of IFAX send size limit MEAPSAFE Setting of MEAP safe mode Lv.2 Details To set for restricting data size at the time of IFAX transmission that Lv.2 Details To set safe mode for MEAP platform.
  • Page 937 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-167 COPIER> OPTION> USER COPIER> OPTION> USER PDL-NCSW Card mngm setting for PDL print job COUNTER7 Setting of software counter 7 Lv.2 Details To set to make PDL print job to be subject to card management by Lv.1 Details To set counter type for software counter 7 on the Counter Check the Card Reader.
  • Page 938 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-168 COPIER> OPTION> USER COPIER> OPTION> USER JA-JOB Setting of job archive target job FROM-OF Deletion of mail sender’s field Lv.2 Details To set the job type subject to job archive. Lv.1 Details To set whether to delete the sender’s field (From) at the time of With the job archive function enabled, archive operation is executed e-mail transmission.
  • Page 939 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-169 COPIER> OPTION> USER COPIER> OPTION> USER MAIL-OF Mail send prohibition to entered address FREE-DSP Display/hide of charge disable screen Lv.1 Details To set to prohibit address entry at the time of e-mail transmission. Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Use Charge Management E-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because...
  • Page 940 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-170 COPIER> OPTION> USER COPIER> OPTION> USER JA-FORMT Display of job archive record format STPL-MAX Set of max number of sheets for staple Lv.2 Details To display the format of images for job archives recorded in jobs Lv.2 Details To set the maximum number of sheets to be stapled in the Finisher.
  • Page 941 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-171 COPIER> OPTION> USER COPIER> OPTION> USER USBI-DSP Dspl/hide of USB input device driver set POL-SCAN Dspl/hide Rights Management Server set Lv.2 Details To set whether to display “Preferences> External Interface> USB Lv.1 Details When “1: Display”...
  • Page 942 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-172 COPIER> OPTION> USER COPIER> OPTION> USER JA-FREP Setting of Fax TX Report with image: SAM JA-PDLB Set of printer driver multi box save:SAM Lv.2 Details To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled. Lv.2 Details To set whether a document can be simultaneously saved to multiple When 1 is set, the Fax TX Report with image is enabled.
  • Page 943 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER 8-173 COPIER> OPTION> USER COPIER> OPTION> USER JA-WEB Setting of Inbox document upload: SAM SNDSTREN Set of setting delete aftr scan and send Lv.2 Details To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time Lv.1 Details To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the of iW SAM.
  • Page 944 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST 8-174 ■ CST COPIER> OPTION> CST CST4-P1 Setting of Cst4 paper size (A5R/STMTR) COPIER> OPTION> CST Lv.1 Details To set the paper size (A5R/STMTR) used in Cassette 4. U1-NAME Dspl/hide ppr name in ppr size group U1 Use case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 4 Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 945 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC 8-175 ■ ACC COPIER> OPTION> CST CST3-U1 Set Cst3 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry1 COPIER> OPTION> ACC Lv.1 Details To set the area-specific standard size paper category 1 used in COIN Setting of charge management Cassette 3.
  • Page 946 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC 8-176 COPIER> OPTION> ACC COPIER> OPTION> ACC CARD-SW Screen set when Coin Manager connected MIN-PRC Set of Coin Manager minimum price Lv.1 Details To set coin or card that the user is urged to insert on the Control Lv.1 Details To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
  • Page 947 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC 8-177 COPIER> OPTION> ACC COPIER> OPTION> ACC SRL-SPSW Setting of Serial I/F Kit support OPCST-BA Set Cst Pedestal not connect error stop Lv.1 Details To set the support level of the Serial Interface Kit. Lv.2 Details To set whether to stop the error that occurs when the Cassette To keep processing performance of printer engine, select “1: Priority...
  • Page 948 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-178 ■ INT-FACE ■ LCNS-TR COPIER> OPTION> INT-FACE COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR NWCT-TM Timeout setting of network connection ST-SEND Installation state dspl of SEND function Lv.2 Details To set the time to keep network connection between this machine Lv.2 Details To display installation state of SEND function when disabling the and the PC application (keep-alive setting).
  • Page 949 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-179 COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR ST-SPDF Install state display of searchable PDF ST-PDFDR Install state dspl of direct print PDF Lv.2 Details To display installation state of searchable PDF transmission function Lv.2 Details To display installation state of direct print PDF function when when disabling the function with license transfer.
  • Page 950 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-180 COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR ST-BRDIM Install state dspl of BarDIMM function ST-WEB Install state dspl: Web Access Software Lv.2 Details To display installation state of BarDIMM when disabling the function Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Web Access Software when disabling with license transfer.
  • Page 951 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-181 COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR ST-TRSND Install state dspl: trial SEND function ST-TSPDF Install state dspl of time stamp PDF: JP Lv.2 Details To display installation state of trial SEND function when disabling the Lv.2 Details To display installation state of time stamp PDF transmission function function with license transfer.
  • Page 952 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-182 COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR ST-DVPDF Install state dspl of device sign PDF ST-AMS Installation state display of AMS Lv.2 Details To display installation state of device signature PDF transmission Lv.2 Details To display installation state of AMS when disabling the function with function when disabling the function with license transfer.
  • Page 953 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-183 COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR ST-PS Install state display of PS function ST-PSLI5 Installation state display of PS/UFR II Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PS function when disabling the Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PS/UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer.
  • Page 954 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-184 COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR ST-LIPS4 Install state display of LIPS4 func: JP ST-PCLUF Install state dspl: PCL/UFR II function Lv.2 Details To display installation state of LIPS4 function (JP only) when Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PCL/UFR II function when disabling disabling the function with license transfer.
  • Page 955 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-185 COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR ST-PSPCU Install state dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func ST-HDCR2 Install state dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set Lv.2 Details To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling Lv.2 Details To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when the function with license transfer.
  • Page 956 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-186 COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR ST-AFAX Installation state display of remote fax ST-OOXML Install state display of Office Open XML Lv.2 Details To display installation state of remote fax client function when Lv.2 Details To display installation state of Office Open XML transmission function disabling the function with license transfer.
  • Page 957 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR 8-187 COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR ST-2600 Instal state dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func TR-OPFNT Trns license key dspl of PCL function Lv.2 Details To display installation state of security function of IEEE2600.1 when Lv.2 Details To display transfer license key to use PCL Font Set when the disabling the function with license transfer.
  • Page 958 Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG 8-188 TEST COPIER> TEST> PG THRU Image correction table use at test print ■ PG Lv.1 Details To set whether to use the image correction table at the time of test print output. COPIER>...
  • Page 959 Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG 8-189 COPIER> TEST> PG COPIER> TEST> PG COLOR-M M-color output setting at test print PG-PICK Setting of test print paper source Lv.1 Details To make a setting of M-color output for test print. Lv.1 Details To set the pickup cassette for test print output.
  • Page 960 Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK 8-190 ■ NETWORK COPIER> TEST> NETWORK IPV6-ADR Setting of PING send address (IPv6) COPIER> TEST> NETWORK Lv.1 Details To set the IPv6 address to send PING. PING Network connection check When PING is sent to this address by COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> Lv.1 Details To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network.
  • Page 961 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL 8-191 COUNTER COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL 2-SIDE 2-sided copy/print counter ■ TOTAL Lv.1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at 2-sided copy/print. COPIER>...
  • Page 962 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER 8-192 ■ PICK-UP ■ FEEDER COPIER> COUNTER> PICKUP COPIER> COUNTER> FEEDER Cassette 1 pickup total counter FEED DADF original pickup total counter Lv.1 Details Large size: 1, Small size: 1 Lv.1 Details DADF original pickup total counter Use case When checking the Pickup counter...
  • Page 963 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JAM 8-193 ■ JAM COPIER> COUNTER> JAM Cassette 4 pickup jam counter COPIER> COUNTER> JAM Lv.1 Details Checking the jam counter of machine’s Cassette 4 TOTAL Printer total jam counter Use case When checking the jam counter of machine’s Cassette 4 Lv.1 Details Checking the total jam counter of printer Display/adj/set range...
  • Page 964 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC 8-194 ■ MISC COPIER> COUNTER> MISC ENT-PTH Finisher feed path counter COPIER> COUNTER> MISC Lv.1 Details Paper pass counter on the Finisher feed path T-SPLY-Y Y toner supply counter Use case - When checking the number of fed sheets Lv.1 Details Number of Y-color toner supply blocks.
  • Page 965 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 8-195 ■ JOB ■ DRBL-1 COPIER> COUNTER> JOB COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1 DVPAPLEN Average paper length of job LSR-DRV Laser Scanner Unit parts counter Lv.1 Details Average paper length in the period from when the printer engine Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement starts printing operation to when it stops the operation.
  • Page 966 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 8-196 COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1 COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1 C1-PU-RL Cassette 1 Pickup Roller parts counter M-SP-RL Multi-purpose Tray Sprtn Roll prts cntr Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life...
  • Page 967 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 8-197 COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1 COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1 TNB-DRV1 Bottle Drive Unit 1 parts counter HOPPER-M Hopper (M) parts counter Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life 2nd line: Estimated life...
  • Page 968 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 8-198 COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1 COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1 RDOOR-U Right Inner Door Unit parts counter PT-DR-C Drum Unit (C) parts counter Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life 2nd line: Estimated life...
  • Page 969 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 8-199 ■ DRBL-2 COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-2 C3-SP-RL Cassette3 Separation Roller prts counter COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-2 Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement DF-PU-RL Pickup Roller Unit prts cntr: DADF 2nd line: Estimated life Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement...
  • Page 970 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 8-200 COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-2 COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-2 C4-FD-RL Cassette4 Feed Roller parts counter FIN-MPDL Paddle parts counter Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life 2nd line: Estimated life Use case...
  • Page 971 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > V-CNTR 8-201 ■ V-CNTR COPIER> COUNTER> V-CNTR BLACK Video count Bk counter COPIER> COUNTER> V-CNTR Lv.1 Details To display the number of sheets (small size: 1, large size: 1) as the TOTAL Video count total counter distribution of Bk-color image ratio (LOW: less than 3%, MID: 3% or Lv.1 Details To display the total of video count values (YELLOW + MAGENTA +...
  • Page 972 Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF 8-202 ■ LF COPIER> COUNTER> LF Y-DRM-LF Display of Drum Unit (Y) life Lv.1 Details To display how much the Drum Unit (Y) is close to the end of life in % (percentage). When a new part is set, the value becomes 0%.
  • Page 973 Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST 8-203 FEEDER ADJUST FEEDER> ADJUST DISPLAY DOCST Adj of DADF img lead edge margin:1-sided Lv.1 Details To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image at DADF 1-sided reading. FEEDER> DISPLAY As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge FEEDSIZE Dspl of original size detected by DADF of the image is decreased by 0.1 mm.
  • Page 974 Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST 8-204 FEEDER> ADJUST FEEDER> ADJUST DOCST2 DADF img lead edge margin: back, 2-sided DOCSTDUP DADF img lead edge margin:front, 2-sided Lv.1 Details To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image on the back Lv.1 Details To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image on the front side at DADF 2-sided reading.
  • Page 975 Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION 8-205 FUNCTION FEEDER> FUNCTION FEED-CHK Specify DADF individual feed mode Lv.1 Details To specify the feed mode for DADF. Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON. Use case When checking the operation of the DADF Motor Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press OK key.
  • Page 976 Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION 8-206 SORTER OPTION SORTER> OPTION ADJUST MD-SPRTN Set restriction at Finisher error Lv.1 Details To set whether to stop the machine when an error occurs at Finisher. SORTER> ADJUST Use case When preferring to run the machine at Finisher error Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
  • Page 977 Supplement/memo The toner reduction function is constantly enabled as default. Tonercolor is limited to 2.1 colors when genuine Canon profile is used, but it may become 2.1 colors or more when a custom profile is used for PS data. Therefore, it is limited to 2.1 colors by the toner reduction function.
  • Page 978 Installation ■ How to check this Installation Procedure ■ Installation ■ Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 ■ Serial Interface Kit-K2 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 ■ Copy Card Reader-F1 ■ IC Card Reader BOX-A1 ■ HDD Data Encryption Kit-C6 ■ PCL International Font Set-B1 Installation...

  • Page 979: Symbols In The Illustration

    Installation > Installation How to Check this Installation Procedure Installation This machine is able to be installed by the user. Symbols in the Illustration For details of installation procedure, refer to the User's Manual. The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure. Screw Unused Parts Tighten...

  • Page 980: Checking The Contents

    Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Checking the Contents Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 Installation Outline Drawing Points to Note at Installation • To enable the functions of the Image Analysis Board, the Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 which is a license option needs to be installed. •...

  • Page 981: Installation Procedure

    Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedure Installation Procedure NOTE: For following steps, proceed to step 2 in the case of the machine with the installed Cassette Feeding Unit and proceed to step 4 in the case of the machine without the 1) Remove the Reader Rear Cover.
  • Page 982 Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedure 4) Remove the screws of the Rear Cover. (Removed 5 screws will be used in step 13.) 6) Remove the small cover of the Controller Box Cover. (Removed small cover of the Controller Box Cover will be used in step 13.) •...
  • Page 983 Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedure 8) Remove the 4 screws. (The removed screws will not be used.) Install the 4 PCB Spacers as shown in the figure. NOTE: • Be sure to install the PCB Spacers in the order of 1 to 4. •...
  • Page 984 Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedure Install the Image Analysis Board. Return the covers to their original positions. • 1 Connector <Without Cassette feeding Unit> • 4 Screws (TP; M3x6) • Controller Box Cover (1 screw, 2 Connectors) •...

  • Page 985: Checking After Installation

    Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Checking after Installation Checking after Installation <Without Cassette feeding Unit> • Controller Box Cover (1 screw, 2 Connectors) • Small Cover of the Controller Box Cover (1 screw) 1)»Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. •...

  • Page 986: Serial Interface Kit-K

    Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K2 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Checking the Contents > Serial Interface Kit-K2 Serial Interface Kit-K2 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 Checking the Contents ■ Serial Interface Kit-K2 Points to Note at Installation [1] Sereal RS Conversion [2] Support Plate X 1 [3] RS Conversion Cable The following options cannot be used in combination with this equipment.

  • Page 987: Copy Control Interface Kit-A

    Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K2 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Preparation before Installation 9-10 Installation Procedure ■ Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 ■ Preparation before Installation [2] D-SUB Support Plate [3] Washer (large) X 2 [1] CC-VI Cable X 1 1) Remove the Reader Rear Cover.
  • Page 988 Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K2 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Preparation before Installation 9-11 NOTE: 4) Remove the 5 Screws of the Rear Cover. (Removed 5 Screws will be used in step 1 of after For following steps, proceed to step 2 in the case of the machine with the installed Installation.) Cassette Feeding Unit and proceed to step 4 in the case of the machine without the installed Cassette Feeding Unit.

  • Page 989: Installing The Serial Interface Kit-K

    Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K2 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K2 9-12 ■ Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K2 6) Remove the small cover of the Controller Box Cover.(Removed small cover of the Controller Box Cover will be used in step 1 of after Installation.) 1) Remove the Face Plate.

  • Page 990: Installing The Copy Control Interface Kit-A

    Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K2 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 9-13 ■ Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 3) Install the Serial RS Conversion Board. • 1 Connector 1) Remove the Face Plate. (Removed Face Plate will not be used.) •...

  • Page 991: After Installation

    Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K2 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > After Installation 9-14 ■ After Installation 3) Connect the CC-VI Cable to the Main Controller PCB. • 2 Hexagon Screws (Nuts will not be used.) 1) Return the covers to their original positions. •...
  • Page 992 Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K2 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > After Installation 9-15 <Without Cassette feeding Unit> • Controller Box Cover (1 screw, 2 Connectors) • Small Cover of the Controller Box Cover (1 screw) • Rear Cover (5 screws) •...

  • Page 993: Copy Card Reader Attachment-B

    Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader Attachment-B4 9-16 Copy Card Reader-F1 ■ Copy Card Reader Attachment-B4 [1] Card Reader Mounting [2] Card Reader Mounting [3] Card reader External Points to Note at Installation Plate (front) Unit X 1 Plate (rear) Unit X 1 Relay Harness X 1...
  • Page 994 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure 9-17 Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure CAUTION: After installing the Copy Card Reader-F1, enter the card number to be used in the following service mode (Level 1): COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD. Otherwise, the card will not be recognized even inserting it.
  • Page 995 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure 9-18 NOTE: 4) Remove the screws of the Rear Cover. (Removed 5 screws will be used in step 10.) For following steps, proceed to step 2 in the case of the machine with the installed Cassette Feeding Unit and proceed to step 4 in the case of the machine without the installed Cassette Feeding Unit.
  • Page 996 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure 9-19 6) Remove the small cover of the Controller Box Cover. (Removed small cover of the 8) Remove the Face Plate. (Removed Face Plate will not be used.) Controller Box Cover will be used in step 10.) •...
  • Page 997 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure 9-20 <With Cassette feeding Unit> Return the covers to their original positions. • Controller Box Cover (1 screw, 2 Connectors) <Without Cassette feeding Unit> • Small Cover of the Controller Box Cover (1 Screw) •...
  • Page 998 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure 9-21 Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit, and change the position of the Install the Card Reader Unit to the Card Reader Mounting Plate (Front) Unit. cable. • 2 Bosses •...
  • Page 999 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure 9-22 Connect the Card Reader External Relay Harness to the connector of the Card Install the Card Reader Mounting Plate (Rear) Unit to the host machine. Reader Unit. • 2 Screws (W Sems; M3x14) •...
  • Page 1000 Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure 9-23 Connect the connector of the Card Reader Relay Harness to the host machine, and Remove the covers of the 2 Cord Guides. install the Connector Cover. • 1 Screw (TP; M3x6) NOTE: To ensure that the connector does not become disconnected, be sure to place the tie- wrap of the Card Reader External Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cover.

This manual is also suitable for:

Imagerunner advance c351 seriesImagerunner advance c250 series

Table of Contents